Air Bag Systems - GM Owners Manuals

Air Bag Systems - GM Owners Manuals
2003 Cadillac Escalade EXT Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-50
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-65
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-24
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-26
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-28
Mirrors .................................................... 2-41
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-46
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-48
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-52
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-71
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-72
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-24
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-31
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-47
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-66
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-48
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-50
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-51
Front Axle ............................................... 5-52
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-53
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-57
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-65
Tires
...................................................... 5-66
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-93
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-100
Electrical System .................................... 5-101
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-110
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-111
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects
............................ 7-9
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath and the name
ESCALADE are registered trademarks and the name
EXT is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. S2318 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle.
If you do this, it will help you learn about the features
and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll
find that pictures and words work together to explain
things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/24/02
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .........1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-21
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-22
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-25
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-31
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-35
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Top Strap ....................................................1-40
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-46
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-50
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-53
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-55
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-57
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-58
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-60
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-64
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-65
Restraint System Check ..................................1-65
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-66
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or lowering
the forward edge of the control. Raise or lower the rear
of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge of the
control.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole
control toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers the
entire seat cushion.
Vertical Control: You can use the vertical control to
adjust the angle of the seatback. Move the reclining
seatback forward or rearward by moving the top of
the control toward the front or toward the rear of the
vehicle.
For information on the reclining seatbacks, see Reclining
Seatbacks on page 1-4.
Horizontal Control: You can adjust your vehicle’s front
seats with the horizontal control located on the outboard
edge of each front seat.
1-2
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-72 for more information.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback.
The buttons used to
control this feature are
located on the front doors.
The engine must be
running for the heated
seat feature to work.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lights
will glow to designate the level of heat selected,
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion
until the seat temperature is near body temperature.
The medium and high settings heat the seatback
and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature.
You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-72 for more information.
1-3
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button
with the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on
the seatback button will glow to designate that only
the seatback is being heated. Additional presses of the
seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again to
heat the whole seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle’s front seatbacks have a recline feature
which is described earlier. See Power Seats on
page 1-2.
The heated front seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull straight up on the head restraint to raise it and
push it down to lower it.
1-5
The front head restraints can also be tilted forward in
addition to being slid up or down. To tilt either of
the front head restraints do the following:
Pull the head restraint toward you until you hear a click.
Then let go. The head restraint will stay in this position
unless you pull it forward more until another click is
heard. There are four positions available: initial position,
first click, second click, and third click. After the third
position (three clicks) is reached, pulling the head
restraint farther will release it back to the normal
upright position.
The rear head restraints can be slid up or down just as
the front head restraints, but they do not tilt.
1-6
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seat is a 60/40 split rear seat that can be
folded to give you more cargo space and access to the
folding midgate. See Midgate on page 2-12 for more
information on operation of the folding midgate.
To fold either side of the seat do the following:
1. Push the rear head restraints all the way down.
2. Pull the seat loop
located where the
seatback and
seat cushion meet.
The seat will release
and allow you to
tilt it toward the front
of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
3. Grasp the seatback and pull it toward the front of
the vehicle. Push it down until it is flat. You may
have to move the front seats forward slightly
to do this.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
To return the seats to the normal position, pull the
seatback up and fold the seat cushion down.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-7
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-8
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-33.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and
will be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the
use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get
the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-14
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-16
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A:
1-18
The belt is over an armrest.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
1-20
The belt is twisted across the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature which may turn off the passenger’s frontal
air bag. If this happens unintentionally, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
1-22
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-27.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-23
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-24
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
in the rear seat. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from the storage clip on the side
of the rear seatback.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-25
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-26
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer
will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be
just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you
choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for
the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-22.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip. Be sure
to remove the comfort guide from the belt before folding
the seat.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use
safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
1-28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
Q:
A:
1-30
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-25. If the child is
sitting in the center position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is
so small that the shoulder belt is still very close
to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place
the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-33
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-36
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad
which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-37
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system and the passenger
air bag status indicator shows off. Never put a rear
facing child restraint in the right front passenger
seat unless the air bag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure the
air bag is off before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
1-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though
it is turned off. General Motors therefore
recommends that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in the rear seat whenever possible,
even if the air bag is off.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and
you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat, the passenger’s frontal
air bag must be off. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-60 and Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 1-46 for more on this
including important safety information.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-39
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-40
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per anchor.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under
it. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.
60/40 Split Rear Seat Folded
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located on the
back of the rear seat frame above the floor for each
rear seating position. In order to get to the brackets,
you’ll have to fold the rear seatback(s).
See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-6 for information
on folding the rear seatbacks.
1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) in the center and right side passenger
second row seating positions.
1-42
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachements to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure
a top tether strap (C).
{CAUTION:
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System”, “Securing a
Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position”, or
“Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position”in the Index for information on
how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-40. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-42. See Top Strap
on page 1-40 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-45
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-46
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. Unless your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system, never put a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat. Here’s why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat unless the air bag is off.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Be sure the air bag is off before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
seat position.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and
you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat, the passenger’s air bag
must be off. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-60 and Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator on
page 3-35 for more information on this including
important safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
therefore recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat whenever
possible, even if the air bag is off.
1-47
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-40 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a child restraint, if you need
to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right
front seat position. See Power Seats on page 1-2.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and you are using a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat, make sure the frontal air bag is off. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag, the off
indicator on the inside rearview mirror will be lit and
stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-48
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten the
belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt
from the retractor once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and you’re using a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat, check to be sure the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag is off before you begin to drive. If the
air bag has been turned off the off indicator will
light and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or
START.
If the on indicator is lit, the passenger’s frontal air
bag has not been turned off. If this ever happens,
turn the vehicle off, unbuckle the safety belt
and perform the steps to install the rear-facing
restraint again. After restarting the vehicle, if the air
bag still doesn’t turn off, install the infant restraint
in a rear seat position of the vehicle and have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags – a frontal air bag for
the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION:
1-50
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They aren’t
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
1-51
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-52
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-34
for more information.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passernger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-53
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-54
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph
(16 to 25 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-55
Side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
1-56
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Operating
Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on
page 4-18 for tips on off-road driving.
Seat Position Sensors
Vehicle’s with dual stage air bags are also equipped
with special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the air bags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full depoyment.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
For both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator,
which inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules.
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For side impact
air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-57
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For side impact air bags, the side of the
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
1-58
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which records
information about the frontal air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system and when the system commands
air bag inflation. It records the status of the driver’s
safety belt usage in a crash in which the air bag
deploys or a crash in which the air bag nearly
deploys. The module also records speed, engine
rpm, brake and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-59
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Air
Bag Status Indicator on page 3-35. If your rearview
mirror doesn’t have either of the indicators pictured,
then your vehicle doesn’t have the passenger sensing
system.
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator – United States
1-60
Passenger
Air Bag Status
Indicator – Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal air bag under certain
conditions. The driver’s air bag and the side air bags
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a child in rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system and the
passenger air bag status indicator shows off. Never put
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger
seat unless the air bag is off.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure the air bag is off before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal air
bag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though
it is turned off. General Motors, therefore,
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat whenever possible,
even if the air bag is off.
(Continued)
1-61
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the air bag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal air bag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint or a booster seat
is detected. If the child restraint has been installed
1-62
and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off, remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position on page 1-46 of this manual.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal air
bag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
air bag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the air bag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an air bag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person isn’t sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the full upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and then enable the passenger’s air bag.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the air bag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal air bag. See “Air Bag Readiness
Light” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-63
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There air bag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-10.
{CAUTION:
For up to 1 minute after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the air bag system.
Be sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing work for
you is qualified to do so.
Air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-64
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air
bags from working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the air bag system
from working properly. Also, the air bag system
may not work properly if you relocate any of the air
bag sensors. If you have any questions about
this, you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-66
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Midgate .......................................................2-12
Tailgate .......................................................2-22
Windows ........................................................2-24
Power Windows ............................................2-25
Sun Visors ...................................................2-25
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-26
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-26
Passlock® ....................................................2-27
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-28
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-28
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-28
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-29
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-30
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-31
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-32
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-35
Parking Brake ..............................................2-35
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-36
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-38
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-39
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-39
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-40
Mirrors ...........................................................2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-41
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-44
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-44
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-45
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist .......................................2-45
OnStar® System .............................................2-46
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-48
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-49
Storage Areas ................................................2-52
Glove Box ...................................................2-52
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-52
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-53
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-53
2-2
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-54
Cargo Cover Panels ......................................2-55
All-Weather Cargo Area .................................2-65
Top-Box Storage ..........................................2-70
Sunroof .........................................................2-71
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-72
Memory Seat ...............................................2-72
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition, door locks, tailgate
and side storage boxes.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
®
In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Service .
See Roadside Service on page 7-6 for more information.
If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may be
able to have your doors unlocked automatically with
the OnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®
subscription. For more information see OnStar® System
on page 2-46.
2-4
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Pressing this
button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The interior
lamps will come on.
Pressing unlock again
within three seconds will
cause the remaining doors
to unlock.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button, such as having the vehicle’s
perimeter lamps come on and/or having the horn
chirp. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-47 for
more information.
2-5
Q (Lock):
Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. Pressing the button again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the lock button, such as having the vehicle’s
perimeter lamps flash and/or having the horn chirp.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-47 for more
information.
L (Panic):
When this button is pressed, the horn will
sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for
up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
the button again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or
by starting the vehicle.
2-6
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery,
positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked.
So, wear safety belts properly and lock
the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the keyless
entry system or the key.
To unlock the door from
the inside, slide the
manual lever forward.
To lock the door, slide the
manual lever rearward.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
or the keyless entry transmitter and a door is open,
the delayed locking feature will delay locking the
doors until five seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on
the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all
the doors.
Q (Lock):
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Press
the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock
all of the doors immediately. See Delayed Locking
on page 2-9 for more information.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
2-9
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following is the list of available programming options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
into gear. This is the mode that is pre-programmed
in the factory for your vehicle.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Mode 3: No automatic door locking.
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door lock mode. Choose one of the three
programming options listed above before entering the
program mode. To enter the program mode, do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2-10
2. Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door lock feature.
3. Press the door lock switch once. You will hear one,
two, or three chimes. The number of chimes tells
you which lock mode is currently selected. Continue
to press the door lock switch until the number of
chimes that you hear matches the number of
the mode that you want. If you take longer than
30 seconds, the locks will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate
that you have left the program mode. If this
occurs, you can repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current automatic settings will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P). This is the mode that is
pre-programmed in the factory for your vehicle.
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door unlock mode. Choose one of the
four programming options listed above before entering
the program mode. To enter the program mode,
do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door unlock feature.
3. Press the door unlock switch once. You will hear
one, two, three, or four chimes. The number of
chimes tells you which unlock mode is currently
selected. Continue to press the door unlock switch
until the number of chimes that you hear matches the
number of the mode that you want. If you take longer
than 30 seconds, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs, you
can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to
re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current automatic settings will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.
This feature is located on
the inside edge of the
rear doors.
The rear doors or your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
Move the lever rearward to disengage the child security
lock feature.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Midgate
To use one of the locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Move the lever forward to engage the rear door
security lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo
area covered and the tailgate and the midgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
CAUTION:
2-12
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following are the main components of the midgate
system:
death. If you must drive with the cargo covers
on and the tailgate and midgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the midgate:
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
setting on OUTSIDE AIR. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Climate
Control System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Midgate Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with a midgate and a removable
rear glass panel. The midgate allows you to extend the
length of your vehicle’s cargo area.
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch
Release Button
D. Glass Lock Knobs
E. Window Retaining
Tabs
F. Midgate Release
Handle
G. Window Alignment
Arrows
2-13
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
{CAUTION:
Although the rear glass can be removed without
folding the rear seats, you will not be able to access
the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold the
seats before removing the rear glass.
If the removable rear glass is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle
in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store
the rear glass in the vehicle, always be sure
that it is stored securely in the midgate
storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster
is on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster
on, you may see a discharge spark coming from the
latch area.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. See Rear Seat Operation on
page 1-6 for more information. The front seats
may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the
rear seats to fold completely.
2-14
2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, so they
unlatch. After both latch levers are unlatched,
the glass-catch release button (C) will catch the
rear glass and prevent it from falling forward.
Follow the next step to release the button and
remove the rear glass.
3. While holding the rear glass in place, press the
glass-catch release button and pull the top of the
rear glass toward you using the grab handle(s) (B)
located at the top of the rear glass.
4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from
the lower window frame channel. Use the grab
handles to assist you in removing the rear glass.
2-15
5. Load the rear glass in its storage pocket in the
midgate using the lower edge of the rear glass
to guide it behind the three rear glass retaining
tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket
(with grab handles facing you) until the next step.
2-16
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both
top corners of the storage pocket, to the locked
position. You may need to push the corner of the
rear glass to allow the lock knob to engage
more easily.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, so they
unlatch.
Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked
position, the rear glass is securely stored.
7. Push both latch levers (A) up to the locked position.
You should hear a click when each latch lever locks
correctly.
Rear seats can be returned to the normal position
when the rear glass is out and stored properly in the
storage pocket.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn
the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of
the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using
the grab handles.
2-17
Be sure to align the rear
glass side-to-side using
the alignment arrows (G)
as shown in the picture.
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place the
bottom edge in the lower channel of the window
frame.
2-18
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the
rear glass flat against the window frame. Use the
grab handles at the top of the rear glass to
assist you.
Lowering the Midgate
The Midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area of
your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass
can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be
removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.
To lower the Midgate, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to
be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to
fold. See Rear Seat Operation on page 1-6 for
more information.
At this point you may choose to remove the rear
glass following the instructions given previously or
leave the rear glass in place.
6. Use one hand to push the rear glass flat against
the window frame and with your free hand push
each latch lever up until it locks. You should hear
a click when each latch lever locks correctly.
2-19
Rear Glass in Normal Position
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, place one hand
against the Midgate so it does not fall forward
unexpectedly. Turn the Midgate handle clockwise
and pull the Midgate toward you.
2-20
3. Lower the Midgate until it is flat.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
Standing outside of the vehicle, place one hand against
the crossbar so the Midgate does not fall forward
unexpectedly. Turn the Midgate handle clockwise and
pull the Midgate toward you.
If you lower the Midgate with the rear glass in the
stored position, you will notice that the entire crossbar
(the bar with the release handle) will lower with the
Midgate. This is completely normal; however, since the
crossbar lowers with the Midgate, it will be heavier.
As you lower the Midgate in this configuration be ready
for the extra weight and be careful not to let the
Midgate fall out of your hands as you lower it.
2-21
Raising the Midgate
Tailgate
To return the Midgate to its normal position, raise the
Midgate up with a firm swinging motion (this will help to
ensure that the Midgate closes with enough force to
engage the latches) until it latches into place securely.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like to
put it back, do so using the instructions given previously.
Use the ignition/door key to unlock/lock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it
latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards
you to be sure it is latched securely.
2-22
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for
different loading situations. Although the tailgate can
be removed without assistance, you may want someone
to assist you with the removal to avoid possible
damage to the vehicle.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release
both retaining cable
clips. To release the
retaining cable clips,
lift the cable so it points
straight out and push
the cable clip forward.
2. With the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull back
on the tailgate at the right edge so it releases
from the block hinge (arrow) and then move the
tailgate to the right to release the left edge.
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure the
tailgate is secure.
2-23
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-24
Power Windows
Express-Down Windows
The driver’s and front passenger’s window switches
have an express-down feature that allows you to lower
the window without continuously pressing the switch.
Press the top of the window switch down briefly to
activate the feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the
window slightly. The express-down feature can be
interrupted at any time by pulling up on the top of
the switch.
Lockout Switch
Press the lockout switch to prevent passengers from
operating the power windows. A small light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power” under
Ignition Positions on page 2-28.
The driver’s door has a switch for each of the passenger’s
windows as well.
Press the top of the switch to lower the window. Pull up
the top of the switch to raise the window.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them out to help block glare at the
front and side windows.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
2-25
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
With this system, the
security light in the
instrument panel cluster will
flash as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
2-26
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power. You can choose different
feedback options for the alarm. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate
if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key
if the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
Passlock®
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-101.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-101. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
2-27
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With your key in the ignition switch you can turn it to
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Don’t drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
A (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
2-28
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off.
C (RUN): This position is for driving.
D (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
to LOCK.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-29
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move forward for better pedal reach. This feature
can be programmed to work with the memory function
(if equipped) on your vehicle. See Memory Seat on
page 2-72.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The buttons used to adjust
the pedals are located on
the driver’s side door panel.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Press the button closest to you to move the pedals
closer to your body. Press the button farthest from you
to move the pedals away from your body.
2-30
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you
contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
2-31
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle has an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-46.
CAUTION:
2-32
(Continued)
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the drive wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.
Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by
shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with
the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) the transmission will
drive in second gear. You may use this feature for
reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road
surfaces.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
2-33
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Tow/Haul Mode Selector Button
Notice: If your wheels won’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object.
You could damage your transmission. Also, if you
stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there
with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat
and damage the transmission. Use your brakes
or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in
position on a hill.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode.
The button for this feature is located on the end of the
column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul
Mode” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-52 for
more information.
The tow/haul mode also interacts with the Road Sensing
Suspension (RSS) feature to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Road Sensing
Suspension on page 4-9.
2-34
All-Wheel Drive
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
when extra traction is needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-52.
2-35
Shifting Into Park (P)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
• Pull the shift lever toward you.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-36
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
• Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-37
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-36.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-32.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then, move
the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF/ACCESSORY. There is no
shift interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.
2-38
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs weren’t done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-39
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Winter Driving” in the Index.
2-40
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-36.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-52.
Mirrors
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the comp/temp display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate
the compass. For more information on calibration,
see below.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing °F, or °C
appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
The mirror also includes a duel display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
P (On/Off):
This is the on/off button.
2-41
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
The electrochromic (self dimming) mirror function is
turned on automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the electrochromic mirror do the following:
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
and hold the on/off button for approximately
six seconds until the green light comes on,
indicating that the mirror is in electrochromic
(self dimming) mode.
2. Turn off the electrochromic mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds until the green indicator
light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2-42
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the comp/temp display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
Passenger Air Bag Indicator
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If your vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an air bag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger air bag is enabled. For more information,
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-43
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
If the mirrors are accidently manually folded in or you
notice that the mirrors will not stay in the unfolded
position, unfold and fold them at least twice using
the mirror controls. Do not unfold them manually.
The mirrors may not stay in place otherwise.
The mirrors may also include a memory function
which works in conjunction with the memory seats.
See Memory Seat on page 2-72 for more information.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press
the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle position.
The mirror control will illuminate. Press the right or left
side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the mirrors.
You may notice the mirror glass adjust as the mirrors fold
in; this is normal. The mirror glass will reposition itself
once the mirrors are unfolded.
2-44
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature.
When you press this
button, a defogger warms
the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside
rearview mirrors to help
clear them of ice,
snow and condensation.
If your vehicle has a rear window defogger, it will also
operate when you press this button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-24 for more information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
with Curb View Assist
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display on page 2-41.
Your vehicle’s mirrors will also be capable of performing
the curb view assist mirror function. This feature will
cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing
you to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or
driver’s mirror will return to its original position.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center. See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-47 for more information.
2-45
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms
and conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your OnStar®-equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button
to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-46
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
OnStar® Personal Calling
With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
g: If your vehicle is
equipped with the steering
wheel control buttons
you can use them
to interact with the
OnStar® system.
See the OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for
more information.
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotes
and sports scores. You listen to your e-mail through
your vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
2-47
HomeLink® Transmitter
If your vehicle has this feature, the control buttons are
located on the driver’s sun visor.
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-48
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for
security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons”
or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the internet at:
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are programming.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
2-49
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-50
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button
while you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal
has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®.
The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink®” to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
2-51
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
Glove Box
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
Resetting Defaults
®
To reset HomeLink to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-52
To open your glove box, pull the lever upward and pull
the door downward.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders for the front
and rear passengers.
The cupholders are located in the center console for the
front passengers and on the rear of the center console
for the rear passengers.
To use the front cupholders, press down on the access
door and release. The door will then open. Push the
door back down to close it.
To use the rear cupholders, pull down on the door
located on the back of the console.
Center Console Storage Area
Luggage Carrier
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
You can load things on top of your vehicle if it has this
feature.
To open it, press the button on the side of the console
and swing the console lid open.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached
to the roof and may have crossrails which can be moved
back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to
the siderails or siderail supports.
The console may be equipped with an accessory
power outlet inside. See Accessory Power Outlets on
page 3-22.
The rear of the console also has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than
200 lbs. (91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carry large things, never
let them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. Load your cargo so that it rests on the
slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten
it securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward as you can.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48.
2-53
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. If plywood is
used, tie it to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from
sliding. To move a crossrail, turn the release knobs,
on both sides of the rail, counterclockwise to
loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired position
balancing the force side to side. Turn the release
knobs, on both sides of the rail, clockwise to tighten
it and try to slide the crossrail back and forth
slightly to be sure it is tight.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports.
Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load
so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle’s second row seat may have an
armrest/storage compartment.
Pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower
the armrest.
To open the compartment, if equipped, push the button
on the front of the armrest and pull the top open.
2-54
Cargo Cover Panels
{CAUTION:
To remove a cargo panel(s), do the following:
1. Lower the tailgate. Use the ignition/door key to
unlock the tailgate if it is locked. See Tailgate on
page 2-22 for more information on the tailgate.
Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove a panel, always store it
in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that is securely
reattached.
Notice: Each cargo cover is designed to support
250 lbs. (113 kg) on top of them. Exceeding the
weight limit can damage the cargo covers.
This damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-piece cargo cover
system. The cargo panels can be removed and
stored in the cargo area of the vehicle with the cargo
panel storage bag.
Before removing the cargo panel(s), notice the
numbers embossed on the upper center portion of
each panel. The panels are labeled 1, 2 and 3.
There are also numbered labels on the bottom of
the panels. The numbers on the top and bottom
of the panels will be used as reference when
removing, storing and reinstalling the panels.
2-55
2. Remove cargo panel 3 by pulling the left and right
cargo panel latches, located on the bottom of each
cargo panel, toward you to release (unlock) the
cargo panel latches.
3. Pull the cargo panel up and then out from the side
rails and set it aside. You only need to remove as
many cargo panels as needed for your cargo
carrying needs.
2-56
4. Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and
set it aside.
Cargo Panel Storage System
The three cargo panels can be stored on either the
driver’s or passenger’s side of the cargo box using the
storage bag. To store the panels, do the following:
5. Remove cargo panel 1, but notice that there are
four latches to release (two left-side and two
right-side latches). Set the panel aside.
After you have removed each cargo panel you can store
it within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel
storage bag.
2-57
1. Secure the storage bag
in the cargo storage
area by attaching
the four clips on the
cargo bag to the
tie-down locations on
either side of the
storage area.
It is very important that you use the storage bag to
restrain the cargo panels during driving.
Before storing the cargo panels, be sure that the
latches are in the closed (locked) position. The
latches are in the closed (locked) position when they
are parallel to the front and back edge of the panel.
Use the art and following instructions for the proper
storage sequence and location for each panel:
2-58
Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
3. Store cargo panel 2 by loading the cargo panel with
latches down and facing inboard (side of panel with
latches would be facing you as you load the panel).
2. Starting with cargo panel 1 (the panel with four
latches), load the cargo panel with latches at the top
of the bag and facing outboard (side of panel with no
latches should be facing you as you load the panel).
2-59
4. Store cargo panel 3 by loading the cargo panel with
latches at the top of the bag and facing outboard
(side of panel with no latches should be facing you
as you load the panel).
5. Zip the bag shut.
2-60
6. Tighten both straps on the bag by pulling on the
free end of the straps.
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels
You only need to reinstall as many cargo panels
as you wish.
1. Remove the cargo panel(s) from the storage bag.
You can either leave the bag attached to the side
of the cargo area while it is not in use, or you
can store it outside of the vehicle.
7. Close both top and bottom mechanisms at the
center of the bag (bag should now be tightly
secured).
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in the
open (unlocked) position. Place cargo panel 1 on
the cargo area rails while holding the back of
the cargo panel up.
2-61
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
Midgate and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the alignment pegs align with
the receivers (see arrow).
2-62
3. Push both left latches away from you to lock the
latches (remember that there are two latches on
each side for panel 1). You should hear a click when
each latch locks correctly. Lock the remaining two
right latches on panel 1.
For any cargo cover panel you must lock the left
latch in place before you can lock the right latch.
If you do not follow this exactly, the cargo cover
panels may not lock in place correctly.
4. Install cargo cover 2 next. Place the latches in the
open (unlocked) position. Place the cargo cover
panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back
of the cargo panel up.
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the alignment pegs align with the
receivers (see arrow).
5. Push the latches away from you (start with the left
latch) to lock the panel in place. You should hear a
click when each latch locks correctly.
6. Install cargo cover 3 next. Place the latches in the
open (unlocked) position. Place the cargo cover
panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back
of the cargo panel up.
2-63
Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
being sure that the alignment pegs align with the
receivers (see arrow).
2-64
7. Push the latches away from you (start with the left
latch) to lock the panel in place. You should hear a
click when each latch locks correctly.
Cargo Tie Downs
All-Weather Cargo Area
Your vehicle has the ability to operate in many different
configurations (cargo panels on or off, midgate up or
down, rear glass in or out), allowing the cargo and
passenger area to be open to the environment. To allow
the vehicle to operate in these configurations, it is
equipped with many different features to help it resist
the elements and protect cargo inside the cargo
area. Some of the features that help with this are the
following: top drain grates, side rail channels, catch
cups, midgate drain, cargo area floor drains and
the rubber cargo mat. These are all part of the water
management system, which is designed to quickly direct
water out of the cargo box.
There are eight cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area.
You can use these to strap cargo in. The tie downs
are also used to secure the cargo cover panel storage
bag. For more information see “Cargo Cover Panels”
earlier in this section.
2-65
Even when the water management system is working
properly and the cover system is on, there may be some
instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.)
when water may be present in the following areas:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Top drain grates
Removable front drain grate (Midgate drain grate)
Side rail channels and catch cups
Front drains
Water drainage area (around both sides of
the cargo box and tailgate side)
F. Rear drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat (central area of mat is intended to be dry)
Maintenance and Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate and cover
system are fully closed and that each element of
the water management system is clean and not blocked
with debris. Follow the instructions given next in this
section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item
of the water management system.
2-66
Top Drain Grates – Removal and
Cleaning
2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from
the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.
The top drain grates are located near the rear glass on
both sides of the vehicle. You may need to clean the
grates and drains if there seems to be blockage. But first
you will have to remove the drain grates by pulling
them off of the vehicle. To remove each drain grate,
do the following:
1. Start with the cargo panels off. See Cargo Cover
Panels on page 2-55 for more information.
2-67
To replace the drain grate do the following:
Side Rail Channels
The side rail channels are located on top of both sides
of the cargo area. You may want to flush them out
with clean water if you notice any debris collecting inside
of them.
When loading cargo into the cargo area, be careful not
to damage the rails.
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the
grate.
2. When you are sure that the clips are aligned with
the slots, push the grate down firmly.
The grate should clip into place. Don’t force the grate
if it won’t clip into place; realign the clips with the holes
and try again.
2-68
Midgate Drain Grate Removal and
Cleaning
The midgate drain grate is located near the base
of the Midgate (the Midgate side facing outside).
You will find a removable drain grate covering the
drain. After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc.
you will need to flush the Midgate drain with water.
But first you will have to remove the drain grate by
using the following steps:
1. Lower the midgate. See Midgate on page 2-12 for
more information.
2. Pull up on the rear (side opposite the midgate) of
the drain grate.
3. Tilt the drain grate away from you and pull it
straight out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
2-69
Cargo Area Floor Drains
Top-Box Storage
Your vehicle also has four cargo-area floor drains
located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo
area. These drains should be cleaned periodically to
allow water to exit the cargo area.
Your vehicle is equipped with top-box storage units on
both side of the vehicle. The passenger side top box
contains the tools you will need to change a flat tire.
The cargo mat has cutouts for the drains. You can flush
the drains through the cutouts, but if the cargo area
is extremely dirty you can lift up the edges of the cargo
floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the
drains with water.
2-70
Use the ignition/door key to unlock the top box lid if it is
locked. Press the key cylinder button and swing the
lid open. Turn on the cargo lamps if you need more light
inside the Top Boxes. See “Cargo Lamps” under
Exterior Lamps on page 3-14 for more information on
cargo lamps. Use the ignition/door key to lock the
top boxes.
Sunroof
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed,
the glass panel can be closed or opened.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracks.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition needs
to be on or RAP needs to be active. See “Retained
Accessory Power” under Ignition Positions on page 2-28.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the
glass panel and sunshade. To close the glass panel,
press and hold the front of the button. The glass will not
be fully seated unless the button is held until the
glass stops moving. With the sunroof closed, press the
forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the
vent position.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof.
To do this, start the vehicle and press the forward
side of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves
to a fully closed position. Release, and press again
to move to the vent position which occurs when
the sunroof is fully tilted rearward. This will reset the
memory and enable the sunroof to function properly.
2-71
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, then the controls
for the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
To store your memory seat, throttle and brake pedals,
mirrors and radio presets, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, and side wing area), throttle
and brake pedals, both of the outside mirrors, and
the radio station presets to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 (for driver 1 or 2) button
of the memory control for three seconds. A double
chime will sound to let you know that the position
has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered memory
control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, throttle and brake
pedals, both the driver’s and passenger’s outside mirror,
and the radio station presets. The settings for these
features can be personalized for both driver 1 and
driver 2. Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memory
buttons labeled 1 and 2 on the driver’s door and the
numbers on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
2-72
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s
seat, throttle and brake pedal, mirror positions and the
radio station presets will be recalled if programmed
to do so through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-47.
The numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,
correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.
The seat, throttle and brake pedals and mirror positions
can also be recalled when placing the key in the
ignition if programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-47.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position, can be
personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2.
To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or 2, do the
following:
1. Select the desired driver number by pressing and
releasing the 1 or 2 button or by pressing the
unlock button on the number 1 or 2 remote keyless
entry transmitter. The seat will move to the stored
memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the identified driver (1 or 2).
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is enabled (active) in the DIC,
then removing the key from the ignition will
cause the seat to move to the exit position.
2-73
✍ NOTES
2-74
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-7
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-18
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-20
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-23
Analog Clock ...............................................3-23
Climate Controls ............................................3-24
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-24
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-30
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-31
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-32
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-33
Tachometer .................................................3-33
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-33
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-34
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator .................3-35
Charging System Light ..................................3-36
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-37
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-38
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-39
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-42
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-44
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-45
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-45
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-46
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-46
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-47
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-47
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-58
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-66
Setting the Time ...........................................3-66
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-67
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-82
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-93
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-93
CD Changer ................................................3-95
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-98
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-98
DVD Distortion .............................................3-99
3-2
Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-99
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-99
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-101
Care of Your CD Changer ............................3-101
Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-101
Cleaning the Video Screen ...........................3-101
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-101
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(United States Only) .................................3-101
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.
B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
D. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons.
See OnStar® System on page 2-46 and Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-98.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-32.
F. Shift Lever/Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-32.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-66.
H. Dome Override Button. See Interior Lamps on
page 3-18.
I. Cargo/Top-Box Lamps Button. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14.
J. Fog Lamps Button. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14.
3-5
K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
L. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-35.
M. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
N. Comfort Control System. See Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-24.
O. Compact Disc Changer. See CD Changer on
page 3-95.
P. Storage Area
Q. Clock. See Analog Clock on page 3-23.
R. Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Button. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 3-20.
S. StabiliTrak® Button. See Stabilitrak® System
on page 4-10.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-52.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
at the top of the steering
column.
Press the button to make your front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. To turn off the flashers, press
the button until the first click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
3-6
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on
the driver’s side of the
steering column under the
turn signal lever.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-7
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For more information on exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-14.
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-101.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
3-9
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed):
For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
L(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
3-10
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
• Cruise control can be dangerous where
•
3-11
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise light on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from
on to resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-12
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
use cruise control on steep hills.
3-13
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak® feature, cruise
control will deactivate if road conditions cause
Stabilitrak® to activate.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or Stabilitrak® system activate,
if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
To turn any lamps back on when in the off mode,
turn the knob to the desired lamp mode. To return to
the AUTO mode, turn the knob to the off position
and release it. The off mode will also cancel and the
lamps will return to the AUTO when the vehicle is
turned off. This mode is not available for vehicles first
sold in Canada.
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put the
system into automatic headlamp mode. The Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is light
enough outside. A light near the symbol will be lit
when in this mode.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position and release it
to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRLs.
A light near the symbol will be lit when in this mode.
•
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
3-14
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. You can change this delay time using the
DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system
will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release.
3-15
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-18.
Lamps On Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and
then back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition is in LOCK and the headlamps
on at exit delay ends (if enabled in the DIC).
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Puddle Lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps to help you
see the area near the base of the front doors when it
is dark out. The puddle lamps will illuminate when a door
is opened or when you press the unlock button on the
keyless entry transmitter. The lamps will time out or turn
off once the engine is started.
You can program the puddle lamps not to come on if
you choose. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-47.
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the light sensor determines it is daytime.
3-16
Fog Lamps
Your vehicle has fog lamps. You can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
your instrument panel.
The fog lamps will go off whenever the high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the
fog lamp button again.
Cargo Lamps
You can use the cargo lamps if you need more light in
the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box
storage units.
Press the button, with this
symbol to turn the cargo
lamps on. Press the button
again to turn them off.
Press the button while the headlamps or foglamps are
on to turn the fog lamps on. Press the button again
to turn them off. An indicator light will glow near
the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
3-17
The cargo lamps symbol light will come on in the
instrument panel cluster when the cargo lamps are on
and the ignition key is turned to run.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel,
located next to the exterior lamps control, up or down to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio
display. This will only work if the headlamps or parking
lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
and will slowly dim to off when all doors are closed.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning
the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp
control, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E (Dome Override):
Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off
even when a door is opened. To return the lamps to
automatic operation, press the button again and it
will return to the out position. In this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open a door.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps and puddle
lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the
out position. If the dome override button is pressed
in, the lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will not
come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
3-18
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has reading
lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to
turn it on. The lamps
can be adjusted to point in
the direction you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn on or off, press the button located next
to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off lights such as the dome and
reading lights if they are left on for more than 20 minutes
when the ignition is in lock. This will keep your battery
from running down.
3-19
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you to
determine how close an object is to your rear bumper
within a given area, making parking easier.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the rear window.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
URPA can be disabled by
pressing the on/off button
located near the climate
control system and radio.
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system doesn’t detect objects
that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) behind
the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using Rear Park Assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
3-20
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system comes on,
the three lights on the display will illuminate to let you
know that the system is working. URPA senses
how close your vehicle is to an object. The distance is
determined by the four ultrasonic sensors located on the
rear bumper. When you shift into REVERSE (R) and
an object is detected, the following will occur in
sequence depending on the distance from the object:
• At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound and one
amber light will be lit;
• at 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights will be lit;
• at 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime will sound
and all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit;
and
• at 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime will sound and
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.
URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider,
and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detect
objects that are above the center of the Cadillac crest
badge on the tailgate. In order for the rear sensors
to recognize an object, it must be within operating range.
3-21
Notice: The URPA system will not work correctly
with the tailgate lowered. You could damage
your vehicle by backing into an object before URPA
detects it. Turn off the URPA system when driving
with the tailgate lowered.
If the URPA Display Flashes Red
If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the
display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.
The light will also flash red while driving if any of the
following conditions exist:
• A trailer or trailer-hitch ball mount is attached to
your vehicle.
• A bicycle or object is on the back of, or hanging out
the cargo area.
• If the tailgate is lowered.
• If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The light will continue to flash until the trailer or the
object is removed or the tailgate is raised and your
vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h).
It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not
kept clean.
So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud, dirt,
snow, ice and slush or materials such as paint or
the system may not work properly. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see your
dealer. For cleaning instructions, see Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-96.
Other conditions that may affect system performance
include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check
for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle is equipped with many accessory power
outlets.
There may also be an accessory power outlet located
on the back of the center console above the cupholder.
Do not try to put the cigarette lighter in any of the
accessory outlets.
Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
One outlet is located in the center console. Press the
button on the side of the console door to access
the outlet.
3-22
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
The front ashtray and lighter are located in the center
console near the cupholders. Press on the access door
to open it and use the ashtray and lighter.
To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button to the lower left
corner of the clock.
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to spin the
clock hands. Release the button before you get to
the desired time.
To remove the ashtray, pull it from the center console.
Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time by
one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
3-23
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control System
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and
an arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed
under and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off.
This is possible since outside air will always flow through
the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in
this section.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and
an arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
3-24
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature
the same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor will run when the outside
temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet
will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside,
the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
The light on the button will illuminate in recirculation.
3-25
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system will
remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you choose
the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) the system
will remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to
heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on
sun load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
9(Off):
Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Manual Operation
)(Bi-Level):
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
6 (Floor):
w9x (Fan):
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode):
Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
- (Defog):
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@(Recirculation): Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function, press
the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
H (Panel):
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
3-26
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,
the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you
know that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
9(Off):
Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the
up or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button,
the AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
3-27
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After ten seconds, the display will
change to show the driver temperature setting and the
selected mode.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After ten seconds, the display will change to show
the driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change
to show the following:
• the current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds,
• the current passenger’s set temperature setting and
an arrow for five seconds and
• the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed.
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature setting
and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along
with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. After
the five second update, the display will change to show
the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The snowflake
symbol will appear on the display when the A/C is on.
^ (Air Conditioning Off):
On some vehicles, when
you turn the air conditioning off, this symbol will appear
on the display. If your vehicle does not have this
symbol, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you
know the air conditioning is off.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the
system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool
and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you select
A/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation,
the A/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/C
compressor will still run to help prevent fogging.
Heating
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
If you want to use the automatic mode, press AUTO
and adjust the temperature by turning the temperature
knob.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the temperature
knob to the desired setting.
On cold days when using manual operation of the
automatic system, choose floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered,
turn the temperature knob to the desired setting.
The heater works best if you keep the windows closed
while using it.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
3-28
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on
the rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
-(Defog):
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
0 (Front Defrost):
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. Press the mode button to select
this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, your air conditioning compressor will
automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry
the windshield.
3-29
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you
do, you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape,
a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Climate Controls Personalization
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
You can store and recall the climate control settings for
temperature, air delivery mode and fan speed for
two different drivers. The personal choice settings
recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel
next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers.
For the most efficient airflow and temperature control,
keep the outlet in the fully opened position.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the climate control
will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver.
The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the
memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.
When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for that driver.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-30
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-31
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with the warning lights and gages. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar.
3-32
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a personal trip
and business trip odometer. See “Trip Information” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-47.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area,
or engine damage may occur.
3-33
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-50.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
your rearview mirror will have a passenger air bag status
indicator.
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger
Air Bag Status
Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger air bag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or
either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag.
3-35
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
air bag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal air bag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to the inflating air bag. Don’t use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the air bag has been
turned off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the air bag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the air bag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal air
bag. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the
Index.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
When this light comes on the DIC will also display the
battery not charging message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-58.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-36
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
3-37
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash if
the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive
with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound when
the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
United States
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-48.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-38
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then
restarted. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-38.
3-39
Traction Off Light
If you have the
Stabilitrak® system,
this light should come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to
warn you if the system is turned off.
For more information on the traction off light,
see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature
of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is
from 100°F (38°C) to about 265°F (130°C).
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
3-40
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display a
TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission
will enter a transmission protection mode. When the
transmission enters the protection mode, you may
notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47 for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC will
display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message
and a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off the
roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the
engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls
below 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues
to operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact your
nearest dealer or the Roadside Assistance Center.
3-41
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above the normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer,
• hot outside air temperatures,
• hauling a large or heavy load,
• low transmission fluid level,
• high transmission fluid level,
• restricted air flow to the radiator.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The Check Engine light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you
it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-42
If the Light is Flashing
Reducing vehicle speed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
3-43
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Check Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-44
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58.
{CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected
oil problems can be costly and is not covered
by your warranty.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control. See Cruise
Control under Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever on
page 3-7.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-52.
3-45
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly
when you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-4.
3-46
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster above the steering wheel. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy and
personalization features. Vehicles without the DIC
buttons will not have all the features as the regular DIC.
See Speedometer and Odometer on page 3-33 for
information on features for vehicles without a full DIC.
A (Trip Information): This button will display the
odometer, personal trip odometer, business trip
odometer, hourmeter, annual log and the timer.
B (Fuel Information): This button will display the
current range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
3-47
C (Personalization): This button will change personal
options available on your vehicle.
D (Select): This button resets certain functions and
turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver (1 or 2)
and the information that was last displayed before the
engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing any of the four buttons will
acknowledge (clear) most current warnings or service
messages. Some warnings that cannot be
acknowledged (cleared) are: ENGINE OVERHEATED,
OIL PRESSURE LOW, REDUCED ENGINE POWER,
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE, STABILITY SYS ACTIVE,
TRACTION SYS LIMITED and TRACTION ACTIVE.
These warnings must be dealt with immediately
and therefore cannot be cleared until the problem has
been corrected.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons are
trip information, fuel information, personalization and
select. The button functions are detailed in the following.
Trip Information Button
Business Trip
Press the trip information button to scroll through the
ODOMETER, PERSONAL TRIP ON/OFF, BUSINESS
TRIP ON/OFF, HOURMETER, ANNUAL LOG and
TIMER. If the personal trip and/or the business trip are
set to ON, you will also be able to scroll through
more messages. See “Personal Trip” and “Business
Trip” next for more information.
Turn Business TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
Personal Trip
Turn PERSONAL TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
• PERSONAL: XXXXX.X MI — This shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for the personal
trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• PERSONAL: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: XX.X MPG— This shows how many
miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is getting for the
personal trip based on current and past driving
conditions.
• PERSONAL: XXX AVG MPH — This shows the
vehicle’s average speed for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: XXX % ANNUAL — This shows the
ratio of personal trip miles to annual miles as a
percent.
• BUSINESS: XXXXX.X MI — This shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for the
business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• BUSINESS: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XX.X MPG — This shows the amount
of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XXX AVG MPH — This shows the
vehicle’s average speed for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XXX % ANNUAL — This shows the
ratio of business trip miles to annual miles as a
percent.
To reset the personal or business trip information,
do the following: press and hold the select button for
one second while in one of the personal or business trip
modes. This will reset all of the information for the
personal or business trip.
3-48
You can also reset the PERSONAL: XX MI, or
BUSINESS: XX MI while they are displayed by pressing
the reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold
the reset stem or select button for one second,
the display will show the distance traveled since the last
ignition cycle for the personal or business trip.
Annual Log
Odometer
Timer
Press the trip information button until ODOMETER
appears on the display. This shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument
cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the select
button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset (not including time
the ignition is off). Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
Hourmeter
Press the trip information button to scroll to the
hourmeter. The hourmeter shows the total number of
hours the engine has run. Pressing and holding the reset
stem for about 4 seconds on the instrument cluster
will also display the hourmeter after the odometer
is displayed when the vehicle is off.
3-49
Press the trip information button to scroll to the annual
log. The annual log shows the mileage accumulated
since it was last reset. To reset the annual log,
press and hold the select button for one seconds.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Information Button
Instant Fuel Economy
Use the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life System.
Press the fuel information button until INST ECON
appears in the display. Instant fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting at the
particular moment in time. The instant fuel economy
cannot be reset.
Fuel Range
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW if
the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an
average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON
appears in the display. Average fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on
current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for two seconds while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
GM Oil Life System
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life System shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show
100% when the system is reset after an oil change.
It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the Oil Life System use the fuel button to reach
the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and then press and hold
the select button for five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE
is displayed. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the display
for 10 seconds to let you know the system is reset.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So,
be sure to check your oil level often. See Engine Oil
on page 5-14.
3-50
Personalization Button
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button
to scroll through the following personalization features.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTOMATIC LOCKING
AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
DELAYED LOCKING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
ALARM WARNING TYPE
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
PERIMETER LIGHTING
3-51
•
•
•
•
•
SEAT POSITION RECALL
EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT
CURB VIEW ASSIST
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY UNITS (ENG/MET)
The default options for the above features were set
when your vehicle left the factory. The default options
are noted in the text following, but may have been
changed from their default state since then.
The driver’s preferences can be recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
labeled 1 or 2 or by pressing the appropriate memory
button 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
Alarm Warning Type
Automatic Locking
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning type, press the select
button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic locking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
locked automatically.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type see Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-26.
3-52
Automatic Unlocking
Delayed Locking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select
your personalization for automatic unlocking, press the
select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-9 for more information.
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
3-53
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last
door is closed.
Press the personalization button until DELAYED
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for delayed locking, press the select
button while DELAYED LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
DELAYED LOCKING ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the lock button
on the door or keyless entry transmitter a second time.
DELAYED LOCKING OFF: The doors will lock
immediately when pressing the power lock switch or the
lock button on the keyless entry transmitter.
SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you unlock
the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position recall see Memory Seat on
page 2-72.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Perimeter Lighting
Seat Position Recall
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): The memory
seat position you saved will only be recalled when the
memory button 1 or 2 is pressed.
SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
put the key in the ignition.
PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it
is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-54
Remote Lock Feedback
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select
your personalization for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-55
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamps on at Exit
Curb View Assist
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON
AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW
ASSIST appears in the display. To select your
personalization for curb view assist, press the select
button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror
will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse see Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist on
page 2-45.
3-56
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT
DRIVER SEAT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position exit, press the
select button while EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit see Memory Seat on
page 2-72.
3-57
• UNITS: ENGLISH
• UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
Display Language
Select Button
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following languages:
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example,
this button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through
the languages you can select the DIC to display
information in.
• English
• French
• Spanish
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
French will be in French and so on. When you see
the language that you would like, release both buttons.
The DIC will then display the information in the
language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four
seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. If there is more than one
message that needs to be displayed they will appear
one after another. Some messages may not require
immediate action but you should press the select button
to acknowledge that you received the message and
clear it from the display. Some messages cannot
be cleared from the display because they are more
urgent; these messages require action before they can
be removed from the DIC display. The following are
the possible messages that can be displayed and some
information about them.
3-58
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
CHECK OIL LEVEL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed. See GM Oil Life System previously in
this section for information on how to reset the message.
This message will clear itself after 10 seconds until
the next igntion cycle.
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
the select button will clear this message from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next igntion cycle.
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the display for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
3-59
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If the engine coolant level is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Adding coolant will clear the
message. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next igntion cycle.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the
engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to a safe operating
temperature. Pressing the select button will clear it
from the DIC display.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
SERVICE AIR BAG
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
If there is a problem with the air bag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Pressing
the select button will clear it from the DIC display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
If a problem occurs with the brake system, this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
Pressing the select button will clear it from the
DIC display.
This message is displayed and a chime will sound
when the cooling system temperature gets too hot
and the engine further enters the engine coolant
protection mode.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for further
information.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing the
select button will clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE 4WD
If a problem occurs with the all–wheel drive system,
this message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the four wheel
drive system needs service. Pressing the select button
will clear it from the DIC display.
3-60
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again
when you begin driving, the suspension system needs
service. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-42. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sure
to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on
page 5-7. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light and message off.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing the select button will acknowledge
this message immediately and clear it from the DIC
display. It will also clear itself after 10 seconds until the
next ignition cycle. The low fuel light near the fuel
gage will still remain on in either case.
3-61
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing the select button will clear it from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next igntion cycle.
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high,
the message center will display this message.
When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message displayed,
you can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered under your
warranty.
If the transmission fluid gets hot, this message will
appear on the DIC along with a continous chime.
Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can
cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and
let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
If the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is in a drive gear, this message will appear on the
display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
Restricted air flow to the radiator.
3-62
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear on
the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
clear it from the DIC display.
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will clear it from the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear
on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
clear it from the DIC display.
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low,
this message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. Pressing the select
button will clear it from the DIC display.
3-63
TRACTION SYS LIMITED
New text under development.
STABILITY SYS LIMITED
SERVICE STABILITY
New text under development.
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message,
it means there may be a problem with your Stabilitrak®
system. If you see this message try to reset the
system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine
again). If the SERVICE STABILITY message still
comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see
your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of Stabilitrak®,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
STABILITY SYS READY
New text under development.
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you’re steering. Stabilitrak®
activates when the computer senses that your vehicle
is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice
or other slippery spot on the road. When the system
activates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY
SYS ACTIVE message is on, you should continue to
steer in the direction you want to go. The system
is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult
driving situations by making the most of whatever
road conditions will permit.
STABILITY SYS DISABLED
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the Stabilitrak® button, or when the
stability control has been automatically disabled.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally leave
Stabilitrak® on. However, you should turn Stabilitrak® off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow and
you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if
you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require
more wheel spin. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow on page 4-46. To turn the Stabilitrak®
system back on press the Stabilitrak® button again.
3-64
There are four conditions that can cause this message to
appear. One condition is overheating, which could occur
if Stabilitrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time. The message will also be displayed if the
brake system warning light is on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-38. The message could be
displayed if the stability system takes longer than usual to
complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
Also, if an engine or vehicle related problem has been
detected, and the vehicle needs service, the message will
appear.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-65
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If a low tire pressure is detected in any of the vehicle’s
tires, this message will appear on the DIC. Press the
select button to clear it from the DIC display. It will
appear at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated
to the correct inflation pressure.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message will be displayed if any of the tire monitor
sensors have malfunctioned, or if the tire monitor
sensors have not been programmed, or if the
recommended tire pressures are not programmed.
Press the select button to clear it from the DIC display.
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the MN button
until the correct minute appears on the display. The time
may be set with the ignition on or off.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display instead.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your
audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-28.
3-66
Radio with Cassette and CD
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
• receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
• display messages from radio stations, and
• seek to stations with traffic announcements.
3-67
XM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only)
XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio service
that offers 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your vehicle is
equipped with Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology. AudioPilot monitors the level of noise in the
vehicle and automatically increases or decreases the
level of the audio to keep your audio above the noise.
To use this feature press the AUTO VOL button
until AVOL ON appears on the display. This feature
works best at lower volume settings where background
noise may be louder than the audio. At high volume
settings, where the audio is much louder than the
background noise, there will be no change in the audio
level. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AVOL OFF appears on the display.
DISP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, push this knob to change what appears on
the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), push this knob while
in XM mode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing and
releasing this knob, you may retrieve four different
categories of information: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
3-68
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1,
FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if equipped). The display
will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FM1 and six FM2, or six XM1 and six XM2 (USA only,
if equipped), by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
q SEEK r:
Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2, or XM1,
or XM2.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3. Tune in the desired station.
q SCAN r:
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best
suits the type of station you are listening to.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the selected
band and only to those with a strong signal.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that pushbutton.
Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds. The radio will produce one beep.
The radio will scan to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. SCAN will be displayed.
Press one of the arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the arrows
for more than four seconds. The radio will produce two
beeps. The radio will scan to the first preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
PSCN will be displayed. Press one of the arrows again or
one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to preset stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-69
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Press and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to enhance the audio performance for different
passengers in the vehicle.
The setting last chosen will appear on the display when
you first press AUTO EQ. Each time you press this
button, another setting will appear on the display and
AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings listed.
Your audio system allows you to choose from four
different equalization settings: normal, driver, rear and
spacious. These settings can be used while listening to
the radio, cassette or the CD player.
NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall vehicle
sound quality for all seating locations.
DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best sound
quality.
REAR: This setting gives the rear seat passengers the
best sound quality.
SPACIOUS: This setting makes the listening space
seem larger.
The radio can save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
3-70
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrows to
take you to the category’s first station.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
3-71
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice
to display the category and then to go to another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
within your chosen category.
4. Press wither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-72
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
3-73
it will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will
hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear
on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette
tape or a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
3-74
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
3-75
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape can
be inserted and will begin playing. A tape symbol is
shown on the display whenever a tape is inserted. If you
hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in
squarely. Press the eject symbol to remove the tape and
start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the eject symbol or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work. Press
this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. If
you press the pushbutton more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive number will appear on the display.
3-76
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape reverses.
The station frequency and REV will appear on
the display. You may select stations during reverse
operation by using the TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. The station frequency
and FWD will appear on the display. You may select
stations during forward operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
q SEEK r:
The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as
the PREV pushbutton. If the arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
3-77
q SCAN r: To scan the tape, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection on
the current side of the tape. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning. Your tape must have at
least three seconds of silence between each selection
for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the
player.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
• The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-99.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. The radio will display READY and the
tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating the
feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
symbol is pressed.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-78
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the disc should begin
playing. The display will show the CD symbol. If you
want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first
press DISP or the eject symbol.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapter disc.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
3-79
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing for
less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current track
has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to
the beginning of the current track. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold this
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.
q SEEK r:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more then once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
q SCAN r: To scan the disc, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track
of the disc. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when
it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off
if this button is pressed first.
3-80
Compact Disc Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother the disc should play.
• It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-81
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and the radio will display
RSE OFF. The radio will return to the last radio
source that you were listening to.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Player
Your vehicle may have the optional Digital Versatile
Disc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display
screen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a
remote control.
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
Before You Drive
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers. The driver
cannot safely view the video screen while driving and
should not try to do so.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for the
country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region
code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player will also play audio CDs. Home recorded
CDs (CD-R or CD-RW formats) will not play in this DVD
player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-82
y (Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD menu.
This button only operates with a DVD.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to modify the
video screen display characteristics.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation):
Use the arrow
keys to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter):
Press this button to select items within
a menu.
DVD Player Buttons
Playing a Disc
O(Power):
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or
when RAP is active.
Press this button to turn the RSE system
on or off.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop):
Press this button to stop the play of the
DVD player. Press this button twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
k (Play/Pause):
Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to
toggle between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
3-83
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the DVD player or on the
remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip
the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing
after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not
begin to play the main title, refer to the on-screen
instructions, as the DVD may be displaying its main
title menu.
Stopping and Resume Playback
DVD Messages
To stop a disc, press and release the stop button on the
DVD player or the remote control. To resume playback,
press the play/pause button on the DVD player or
the remote control. As long as the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,
the movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stop
button has been pressed twice, the disc will resume play
at the beginning.
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc within 25 to 30
seconds. The disc will then be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of this disc
automatically.
• Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
able to be read or if the disc format is not
compatible with the DVD player.
• Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
• Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if
the DVD player can not play the disc. Severely
damaged discs will cause this error.
• Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the DVD player.
• No Disc: This message will be displayed if the
PLAY button is pressed and no disc is in the player.
3-84
Parental Control Button: This button is located on the
front of the DVD console, behind the video screen,
near the driver of the vehicle. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute
the audio. The video screen will display Parental Control
ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player
will flash. It will also disable all other button operations
from the remote control and the DVD player, with
the exception of the eject button. The driver will then be
able to gain the attention of the rear seat passengers.
Press this button again to restore normal operation
of the DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
in an enabled power mode.
3-85
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in either the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones and the infrared receiver
for the remote control. If the screen is in the closed
position, the infrared signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones and the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
damage may occur. See Cleaning the Video Screen
on page 3-101 for more information.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the infrared window
below the video screen and press the desired button.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of
the entertainment system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power):
Press this button to turn the DVD player
on or off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation):
Use the arrow
keys to navigate through a menu. The up arrow will skip
to the next chapter or track, the down arrow will take you
to the beginning of the current chapter or track. Press the
down arrow twice to take you to the previous chapter or
track. The right arrow will fast forward and the left arrow
will fast reverse through a chapter or track.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to modify the
video screen display characteristics.
e (Audio):
Press this button to call-up a menu that will
operate only when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function is defined by the disc and is
dependent of the disc.
r (Fast Reverse):
Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
3-86
c (Stop):
Press this button to stop the play of a DVD
or CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning
of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The remote control
numeric keypad provides you with the capability of direct
chapter, title and track number selection.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, within 3 seconds of inputting a numeric
selection to clear all numeric inputs.
Press the button, located on the bottom left of the
numeric key pad, to select chapter, title, and track
numbers greater than 9.
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on.
y (Menu):
Press this button to access the DVD menu
(this button only operates with a DVD).
3-87
r (Enter):
Press this button to select items within
a menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button will operate only when a DVD is being
played and a menu is active.
| (Angle):
Press this button to call-up a menu
that will operate only when a DVD is being played.
The format and content of this function is defined by
the disc and is dependent of the disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to call-up a menu
that will operate only when a DVD is being played.
The format and content of this function is defined by
the disc and is dependent of the disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright or the previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on, to start play of a DVD or CD and to toggle
between play and pause of a DVD or CD.
Slow Play: When the DVD is playing, press the pause
button then press the fast forward button. The DVD
will continue playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow
play mode, press the play/pause button.
Headphones
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. To turn the
headphones OFF activate the ON/OFF control.
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright or the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Close the battery door securely.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and it would not be covered by your vehicles
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless infrared
headphones.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The headphones will automatically turn off if they lose
the infrared signal from the system after approximately
four minutes in order to preserve their battery power.
The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if the
headphones are out of range of the infrared signal
transmitters that are located below the video display
screen.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-88
Battery Replacement
Stereo RCA Jacks
To change the batteries, do the following:
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the front of the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
you to connect audio and video from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to your
RSE system just as you would to a standard television.
Standard RCA cables are needed to connect the
auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The yellow connector
inputs video and the red and white connectors input
right and left stereo audio. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper connection of your auxiliary
device.
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-89
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, you will need
to press the SRCE button on the faceplate or the remote
control to change to the auxiliary mode. Pressing the
SRCE button will toggle the RSE system between
the auxiliary device and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in PAL system.
To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the navigation down arrow key to scroll down
to Video Format.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the navigation key to select the PAL video
format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio you may adjust
the speaker volume on the radio. If the RSE system
power is not on, the RSE system will not be an available
source on the radio. Refer to the radio information for the
radio that your vehicle has for more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the Rear Seat Audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-93 for more information.
Audio system (if equipped)
3-90
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
3-91
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the SRCE button
to toggle between the
DVD player and the
auxiliary source.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Press the Display button
on the DVD player or
on the remote control.
Change the display mode.
Problem
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
Recommended Action
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the
signal is good.
Change the Video
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Press the Menu button
on the DVD player or on
the remote control and
change the audio or
language selection on
the DVD menu.
Problem
The remote control
does not work.
After stopping the
player, I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Point the remote control
directly at the infrared
window below the video
screen while using.
Check that the batteries
are not dead or put
in wrong.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. (The power
indicator light will flash.)
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Press the SRCE button
to change from the DVD
player mode to the
auxiliary source mode.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
What is the best way to
clean the video screen?
Recommended Action
Press the Load/Eject
button on the DVD player.
Turn the power off, then
on again, then press the
Load/Eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
DVD player.
This could be caused by
interference from cellular
telephone towers or by
using your cellular
telephone in the vehicle.
See your dealer for
assistance.
Wipe the video screen
with a soft cloth that is
damp with water.
3-92
Navigation/Radio System
The radio system can also communicate with your
navigation system to broadcast announcements on
traffic, weather and emergency alert communications.
For information on how to use this system, see the
“Navigation System” manual.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
The display screen is located in the center of the
instrument panel. There are “hard” buttons and a touch
sensitive screen.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an AM-FM radio
navigation radio system that includes digital sound
processing (DSP), Radio Data System (RDS) with
program “type” selections (PTY) that will seek out the
kind of music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite
Radio Service capabilities (United States only).
3-93
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to
any of the audio sources: radio, cassette tapes,
CDs, DVDs, XM™ (USA only, if equipped) depending
on your vehicles options. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources that the
front seat passengers are not listening to. For example,
rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always override the
RSA controls.
Rear Seat Audio Controls
u (Volume):
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume. The left knob controls the left headphone and
the right knob controls the right headphone.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, DVDs, or XM™
(48 contiguous US states, if equipped) depending
on your vehicles options.
x SEEK w:
While listening to FM1, FM2, or AM, or
XM1 or XM2, press the up or the down arrow to
tune to the next or to the previous station and stay
there. If the front radio is in use, you cannot seek
through different stations.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is
equipped with the Bose® audio system. You may
operate the rear seat audio functions even when the
primary radio power is off.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection.
If the cassette tape on the front radio is in use, you
cannot seek through different selections on a tape.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. If the CD player on the front radio
is in use, you cannot seek through different tracks.
3-94
PROG (Program): The front passengers must be
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:
CD Changer
• Press this button to go to the preset radio stations
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
• When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
• When a CD is playing in the radio, press this button
to go back to the beginning of the CD.
• When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.
The compact disc changer plays up to six standard size
CDs continuously. Individual CDs may be loaded or
ejected into or from any position.
A green light on each numbered button indicates a CD
is loaded in the respective position. An amber light
on a numbered button indicates that a CD is playing.
When loading CDs, the loading slot indicators turn
amber to indicate that the player is ready to accept a
CD. CDs can be loaded or ejected with the radio or the
ignition being on or off.
You must load CDs with the label side up. If you do not,
the player will automatically eject the CDs.
Notice: Loading CDs with adhesive labels will
damage the player.
3-95
To load a CD, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOAD button. Available positions will
blink amber.
2. Select a position by pressing the desired numbered
button with the amber blinking light. If a button is
not pressed within five seconds, the changer will go
to the lowest available position.
3. Load the CD when the loading slot indicators turn
amber. An internal door will open allowing a
single CD to be inserted into the changer.
After approximately 10 seconds the changer will
be ready to play.
To load two or more CDs, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button. The first CD will
be loaded into the lowest numbered empty position.
2. Load a single CD when the loading slot indicators
turn amber. After about 10 seconds the changer will
cycle to the next available position.
3. Repeat Step 2 until all CDs are loaded into all of
the desired positions. If you do not wish to load all
of the positions, you can cancel the load all
function by pressing a button with a green flashing
indicator light or wait 20 seconds for the changer
to time out.
To eject a single CD, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the eject button (upward pointing arrow).
The buttons with loaded CDs will blink amber.
2. Press one of the amber blinking buttons to select the
location of the CD you want to eject. The changer will
move to that location and eject the CD. If you do not
remove the CD from the player within 10 seconds, it
will be reloaded. If the eject button is pressed and a
numbered location button is not pressed within
five seconds, the current or last played CD will be
ejected.
To eject all CDs, press and hold the eject button.
There are two ways to play a CD.
Perform one of the following:
• With the radio on, press the desired numbered
button with a green indicator light on the CD
changer.
• Press the TAPE DISC button on the radio.
The CD changer will go to its last played position.
3-96
CD Functions
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. If you hold
or press this pushbutton more than once, the player
will continue moving back through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly through a track. Release it to resume
playing.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly through a track. Release it to resume
playing.
5 X: Press this pushbutton to select a CD. The CD
number and track number will be displayed.
6 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ALL
will appear on the radio display, which will randomly play
all of the loaded CDs. Press and hold this button until
you hear a beep and the radio will display RDM ONE,
3-97
which will randomly play the tracks on the current CD.
Press this button again to turn off random play,
RDM OFF will appear on the radio display.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
BAND: Press BAND to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing.
TAPE DISC: Press this button if you have a CD loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
CD. Press this button to switch between playing a tape
and the CD changer if all are loaded.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
CHK CD (Check): If this message appears on the
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• You are driving on a very rough road. The CD
should play when the road gets smoother.
• A CD is upside down.
• It is dirty, scratched or wet.
• It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The CD player is very hot.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealership.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition):
You can press this
button to interact with the OnStar® system. See the
OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for more
information.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset buttons
on the selected band. If a cassette tape is playing,
press this button to play the other side of the tape.
If a compact disc is playing in the CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to select AM, FM1
or FM2, XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped), or a
cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loaded
to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the
display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R:
Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player
will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the
down arrow.
Q VOLR:
Press the up or the down arrow to increase
or to decrease volume.
3-98
DVD Distortion
XM™ Satellite Radio Service (USA Only)
You may experience audio distortion in the
IR headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
®
* Excludes the OnStar System.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
3-99
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through your dealership.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it
as a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
3-100
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten by hand,
then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Care of Your CD Changer
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System (United States Only)
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
3-101
Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM™ system may be affected
if your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of your XM™ system. Make
sure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
✍ NOTES
3-102
✍ NOTES
3-103
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Road Sensing Suspension ...............................4-9
Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-10
Steering ......................................................4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-15
Passing .......................................................4-15
Loss of Control .............................................4-17
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads .......................................4-18
Driving at Night ............................................4-32
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-34
City Driving ..................................................4-37
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-38
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-39
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-40
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-40
Winter Driving ..............................................4-42
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-46
Towing ..........................................................4-48
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-48
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-48
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-48
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-51
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-51
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-52
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the
person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in
a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person
had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs
and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Stabilitrak® System on
page 4-10.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking
— rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if
you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-39.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there’s a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Road Sensing Suspension
The Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) feature provides
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
RSS also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when
engaged, will provide additional control of the shock
absorbers. This additional control results in better ride
and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-52.
4-9
Stabilitrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak®, which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to insure there are no problems. You may hear or
feel the system working. This is normal and does not
mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately two
miles of driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking or multiple turns during the
first two miles of driving after starting your vehicle, the
STABILITY SYS DISABLED message may appear.
If this is the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.
4-10
You will need to turn the vehicle off and then restart it to
initialize Stabilitrak®. If either message appears on
the Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehicle
hasn’t gone through hard acceleration, braking or
multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. You may also feel or
hear the system working; this is normal. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
Stabilitrak® and part of
the traction control system
can be turned off or
back on by pressing the
Stabilitrak® button located
on the instrument panel.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light will
illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when Stabilitrak® is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
When the Stabilitrak® system has been turned off you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If You Are
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-46.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
Stabilitrak® system. Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off Stabilitrak®, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
For more information on the traction active message,
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due
to heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively.
If you do, you may be causing damage to your
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
4-11
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically
disabled. The system will come back on after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes
or longer depending on brake usage.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Notice: Don’t allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively when the traction off, ABS and brake
lights are on and the SERVICE STABILITY MESSAGE
is displayed. In this situation, damage to the
transfer case is possible. This could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. You should
immediately reduce engine power until the lights
and messages are no longer displayed.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”
under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7
4-12
Stabilitrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems — steering
and acceleration — have to do their work where the tires
meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
You may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE
message on the message center. See “Stability System
Active Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-58.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-13
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-14
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-15
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-16
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder
and start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that if your right outside mirror is
convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-17
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make it
much better suited for off-road use than a conventional
passenger car. Its higher ground clearance also helps
your vehicle step over some off-road obstacles. But your
vehicle doesn’t have features like special underbody
shielding and a transfer case low gear range, things that
are usually thought necessary for extended or severe
off-road service. This guide is for operating your vehicle
off paved roads.
Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
4-18
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked.
Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide.
You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be?
What are the local laws that apply to off-roading
where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should
check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you
be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get
the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
CAUTION:
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 and Tires
on page 5-66.
(Continued)
4-19
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-20
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the
terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of
terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its
many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-21
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can’t control
the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road.
And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very
time you need special alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking. See Drunken
Driving on page 4-3.
4-22
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t
do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, don’t
drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
4-23
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you
need, because you don’t want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
4-24
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you’re there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is
about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could
go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t
make it up the hill, you must back straight down
the hill.
• If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can’t do it. What should
I do?
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels
are straight and maneuver as you back down.
It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle
would take if it rolled downhill.
4-25
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
vehicle control?
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-26
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you don’t drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-27
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-28
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t
drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
″walk the course″ so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
4-29
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking
distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On
wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and your passengers could drown.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-30
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles
or exhaust pipe, don’t try it — you probably won’t
get through. Also, water that deep can damage your
axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that when
your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it’s only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing
water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-34
for more information on driving through water.
4-31
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-32
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Don’t drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving,
don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and aren’t
even aware of it.
4-33
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the
road and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
4-34
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-35
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-36
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps – not just your
•
•
parking lamps – to help make you more visible to
others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-66.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-38.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
4-37
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-38
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’s
work — don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-39
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-40
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Operating
Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on
page 4-18 for information about driving off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
{CAUTION:
•
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-41
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-42
Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow – drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-43
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats – anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
4-44
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t
collect there.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
4-45
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
4-46
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-74.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has the Stabilitrak® System, turn the system off by
pressing the Stabilitrak® button so that the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED message and the traction off light
are illuminated on the instrument panel cluster. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may
need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to
be pulled to some place where you can continue driving.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be
covered by warranty.
4-47
Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
4-48
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of
the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put things
in the bed of your truck, you should make sure
they are properly secured.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
4-49
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Operating Your
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off Paved Roads on page 4-18.
4-50
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you can carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you
buy and install the new equipment.
Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-48.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Automatic Level Control
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The automatic level control rear suspension comes as a
part of the Road Sensing Suspension. See Road
Sensing Suspension on page 4-9 for more information.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to carry
a slide-in type camper.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned
to OFF. You may hear the air compressor operating
when the height is being adjusted.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the height.
Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to your vehicle can damage it, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by warranty. Don’t
install a slide-in camper or similar equipment
on your vehicle.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside, but you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicles CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so that
you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4-52.
4-51
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
4-52
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
The tow/haul feature assists when pulling a heavy trailer
or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the tow/haul
mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Your vehicle is provided with a button at the end of
the shift lever which when pressed enables tow/haul.
When the button is pressed, a light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to indicate that tow/haul has
been selected. Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing
the button again, at which time the indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will
automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started.
4-53
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR). See Weight of the Trailer later in this section.
Tow/haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
4-54
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed to be
used with a fifth-wheel hitch device. Using such
a device could result in damage to the vehicle.
These damages would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
Vehicle
AWD 6.0 L
*Maximum Trailer
Weight
**GCWR
Axle Ratio
3.73
7,400 lbs. (3 357 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
*Tongue weight should be 10 percent to 15 percent of trailer weight up to 1,000 lbs. (453 kg) maximum.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-55
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-48 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW and rear axle
limits for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distributing sping bars.
4-56
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
• If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg), be sure
to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch
and sway control of the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Since your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak®, your
trailer brake system cannot tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
4-57
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-58
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-59
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-60
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire is
tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a
trailer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
If your trailer is equipped with electric brakes, you can
get a jumper harness (electric trailer brake control)
with a trailer battery feed fuse from your dealer. If you
need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard four-way
round connector you can also get an adaptor from
your dealer.
4-61
✍ NOTES
4-62
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Brakes ........................................................5-39
Battery ........................................................5-43
Jump Starting ...............................................5-44
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-50
Rear Axle .......................................................5-51
Front Axle ......................................................5-52
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-53
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming ...........................5-54
Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................5-55
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-57
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-57
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-57
Headlamps ..................................................5-58
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps .............................5-62
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-63
Taillamps .....................................................5-63
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-64
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-65
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-66
Inflation — Tire Pressure ...............................5-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-69
Buying New Tires .........................................5-70
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-72
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-73
Tire Chains ..................................................5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Spare Tire ...................................................5-92
Appearance Care ............................................5-93
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-93
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-95
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-95
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-96
5-2
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-98
Finish Damage .............................................5-98
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-98
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-98
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-99
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-100
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-100
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-100
Electrical System ..........................................5-101
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-101
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-101
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-101
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-110
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-110
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-111
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-19.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-3
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine.
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your
fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
5-6
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
{CAUTION:
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
tooquickly. This spray can happen if your tank
is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-96.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. this would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-42.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle to
the lower left of
the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release, located near the
center of the grill.
3. Lift the hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 6000 H.O. V8 engine you will see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
B. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-30 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
on page 5-27.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
D. Engine Oil Fill. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-30 and Engine
Fan Noise on page 5-36.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-44.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-44.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-37.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-39.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood Fuse Block”
under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-101.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-43.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-38.
5-13
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow loop handle and
is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-14
The engine oil fill cap is
located on the valve cover
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for further
location information.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-110.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
5-15
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you choose to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container. If you have
your oil changed for you,
be sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
5-16
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle.
You should look for and use only oils which have the
API Starburst symbol and which are also identified
as SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE 10W-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it’s going to be 0°F (−18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-17
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Message
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,
reset the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see “GM
Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-47 for vehicles equipped with the DIC, or do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for 10 seconds,
the system is reset.
If the system does not reset, try the procedure once
again. If it still does not reset, see your dealer for
service.
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for location of engine
air cleaner/filter and
change indicator
(if equipped).
How to Inspect
Locate the filter change indicator. When the change
indicator turns black or is in the red/orange “change”
zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator. To inspect
the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and
lightly shake filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the
filter remains “caked” with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect and replace the filter and reset the indicator
(if equipped), do the following:
When to Inspect
If your vehicle is equipped with a filter change indicator
it lets you know when the filter needs to be replaced.
Vehicles with a restriction indicator, inspect the air
cleaner/filter at every oil change and replace the filter
when the indicator tells you to. Vehicles without a
change indicator, inspect the air cleaner/filter at every
oil change and replace it at the first oil change after
25,000 miles (40 000 km).
The air cleaner/filter assembly is located on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
5-19
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
1. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and
lift up the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing.
4. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
6. Reset the filter change indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
5-20
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you’re driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-21
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with the graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-22
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
How to Add Fluid
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a
hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed
down to get an accurate reading.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under How to Check.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-24
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL® is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner -- at 30,000 miles
(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other than
DEX-COOL® is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-25
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank
is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
If the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and
stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
5-26
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-40. In addition, you
will find a LOW COOLANT, ENGINE COOLANT HOT,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the DIC on the instrument panel.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-47.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.
Notice: Your pressure cap is a pressure-type cap
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
See “Capacities and Specifications” for more
information.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-27
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
(Continued)
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam
or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION:
5-28
(Continued)
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-52.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
2. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving – DRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-29
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-30
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL® is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner — at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL® is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if coolant
is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible but the
coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
radiator pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
CAUTION:
5-32
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
cap when the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-33
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. You can
remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
5-34
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-35
Engine Fan Noise
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-36
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.
When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to
provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday
driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and
the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
Locate the cap with this
symbol. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring
the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
What to Use
Notice:
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the LOW WASHER FLUID message
is displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
toward the front of the
vehicle on the driver’s side.
5-38
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-15.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-39
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-17.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-40
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-41
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-16.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-42
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-98.
To reprogram your sunroof (if equipped), see Sunroof
on page 2-71.
5-43
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it
safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-44
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located under a
red plastic cover near
the engine accessory drive
bracket. To access the
remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red
plastic cover.
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located on the
engine accessory drive
bracket and is marked
GND.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
5-45
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid
is there. If it is low, add water to take care of
that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be
present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-46
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal
of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal
of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle
has one. Your vehicle’s
remote negative (−)
terminal is marked GND.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-47
9. Connect the other end of
the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm)
away from the dead
battery, but not near
engine parts that move.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
5-48
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal.
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals.
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
5-49
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-15.
(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
5-50
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
The proper level is from 5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug
hole. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-51
Front Axle
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-52
Headlamp Aiming
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system
equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim has
been preset at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even though your horizontal aim
indicators may not fall exactly on the “0” (zero) marks on
their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you (for vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer
for service. However, it is possible for you to re-aim your
headlamps as described in the following procedure.
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg)
on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam
lamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if
the low beam lamps are aimed properly.
5-53
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near
the headlamps.
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the
indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (H)
(left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming
procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only
vertical (V) (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical
aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx®
socket or T15 Torx® screwdriver.
5-54
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam
lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low beam lamp. Record this distance.
5-55
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw (V) until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5-56
Bulb Replacement
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-64 for the proper
type of bulbs to use.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
After your vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been
replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly
different shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-57
Headlamps
1. Open the hood of the vehicle.
2. Pry up the eight fastener plugs on the radiator
cover and pull the fasteners out.
3. Lift off the radiator cover.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Low-Beam Headlamp (HID)
Daytime Running Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp
5-58
4. Pull the top left or right corner of the grill out so the
clips release. This will give you the needed
clearance for removing the headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the horizontal pin from the headlamp
assembly by lifting the end of the pin upward
until it unsnaps and then pulling it toward the center
of the vehicle.
5-59
8. Disconnect the electrical connector from the lower
corner of the headlamp assembly. This will give you
better access to the headlamp assembly.
9. Remove the rubber,
circular-shaped bulb
cap of the affected bulb
from the headlamp
assembly.
6. Remove the vertical pin from the headlamp
assembly by turning the end of the pin away from
you until it unsnaps and then pulling it upward.
7. Remove the headlamp assembly by lifting it up and
then pulling it out and away from the front of the
vehicle.
10. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and
remove it with the old bulb from the headlamp
assembly.
11. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
5-60
12. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb,
using care not to touch the bulb with your hands,
fingers or anything damp or oily.
13. Place the connector with the new bulb into the
headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise until it
is tight.
14. Reinstall the rubber, circular-shaped bulb cap onto
the headlamp assembly.
15. Reconnect the electrical connector to the lower
corner of the headlamp assembly.
16. Place the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle,
being sure to align the lower locator tab with the
pocket on the vehicle (see arrow). Push the
headlamp assembly straight in and then down into
position.
17. Install the two pins and snap the ends into their
locked position.
18. Reinstall the grille and radiator cover by reversing
the removal procedure described previously.
5-61
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
previously.
2. Remove the rubber, circular-shaped bulb cap for
the affected bulb from the headlamp assembly.
3. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp
assembly. (There is no lock for the sidemarker lamp.)
4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
6. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing and
turn it clockwise until it locks. (There is no lock for
the sidemarker lamp.)
7. Reinstall the rubber, circular-shaped bulb cap to the
headlamp assembly.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle
by reversing the previous mentioned steps.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Low-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
5-62
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.
It is recommended that this component be replaced as
a unit by your dealer.
Taillamps
A. Stop Lamp/Tail Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp/
Tail Lamp
C. Back-Up Lamp
3. Remove the lamp assembly.
1. Open the tailgate.
5-63
4. Press the release tab
and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to
remove it from the
taillamp housing.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Low-Beam Headlamps (HID)
High-Beam Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
Bulb Number
*
9005 or 9005 LL
4114K
194
3157 or
3157K Long Life
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
Taillamp and Stop Lamp
3057
6. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the
taillamp housing and turn the socket clockwise into
the taillamp housing until it clicks.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp and
Stop Lamp
3057
Back-up Lamp
3157
7. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
5-64
*For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See Wiper Blade
Check under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-12 for
more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 5-111. Here’s how to remove the shephard’s
hook type.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-65
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
{CAUTION:
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-66
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation — Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
Too much heat
How to Check
Tire overloading
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-69 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-73 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the
wheel wrench and jack handle extensions to tighten the
cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
5-68
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-110.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-69
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specifications (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud
and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
5-70
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and youcould
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
If your vehicle has 17 inch road tires (those
originally installed on your vehicle) it is all
right to drive with the 16 inch spare tire that
came with your vehicle. When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with the same overall diameter as
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels. Because
this spare tire was developed for use on your
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling or
cause damage to your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
5-71
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
5-72
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
5-73
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-75
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire
on the other side of the vehicle, at the
opposite end.
5-76
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack and wheel blocks are located under a cover
near the passenger side seat.
To remove the jack and wheel blocks, do the following:
Rear Seat (Passenger Side) Jack Cover
1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts
one-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the
jack cover off.
2. Release the bottle jack from its holder by turning
the knob (arrow) on the jack counterclockwise to
lower the jack head from the bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks from the jack by turning
the top wing nut counterclockwise.
The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the
passenger’s side Top-Box Storage unit.
5-77
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side Top-Box
Storage Box. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if
it is locked. See Top-Box Storage on page 2-70
for more information on the Top-Box Storage unit.
Top-Box Storage (Passenger Side)
2. Remove the black pouch from the Top-Box.
You now have all of the tools you will need to lower
the spare tire and change a flat.
5-78
You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock (J),
open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper
and use the ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in the
rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later
in this section.
5-79
5. The wheel wrench has
a hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable toward you to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
6. When the tire has been
lowered, tilt the
retainer (D) at the end
of the cable so it
can be pulled up
through the wheel
opening.
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-80
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet.
5-81
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
Jack Positions (overall view)
These locations front (A) and rear (B) are the
general area of jack placement. See text and art
following for the exact jack placement.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-82
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat
tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you’ll need to
use the jack handle (C)
and both jack handle
extensions (D). Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack
handle extensions.
Attach the jack handle to
the jack. Use the jacking
pad provided on the
rear axle.
3. Position the jack under the vehicle.
Rear Position
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you’ll need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to clear the ground.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
5-83
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
5-84
6. After mounting the spare,
put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten
each wheel nut by hand.
Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten
the wheel nuts until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
8. Tighten the nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications” in
the index for the wheel nut torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab
on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
5-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire,
Jack and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire
carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period of time could damage the wheel. To avoid
this, always stow the wheel properly with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel repaired
as soon as possible.
5-86
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down and toward the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer (D)
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper
and into the hoist
shaft.
5. Raise the tire partway upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
The cable cannot be overtightened.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
5-87
To store the jack and tools, do the following:
1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in
the Top-Box storage area.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and bottle jack together
with the wing nut and secure them to the bracket in
the vehicle.
Push and Pull (A) Rotate or Turn (B)
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-88
3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover
wingnuts.
Secondary Latch System
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch
do the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It’s designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and Tools”
earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is
visible.
2. If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-89
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks
on their shortest ends,
with the backs
facing each other.
5-90
7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
11. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
10. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
12. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
5-91
13. Tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and
pull it through the
wheel opening.
Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
14. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” earlier in
this section.
5-92
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation — Tire
Pressure on page 5-67 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-48 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-76.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
Gasoline
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
You and get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-99.
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous – some more than
others – and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-93
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use on a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
5-94
Cleaning Wood Panels
Care of Safety Belts
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Cleaning the Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove
normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-99.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive
cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window,
an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
5-95
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-99.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-99.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Cleaning the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
5-97
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
5-98
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step,
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-17.
5-99
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-100
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-64.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-101
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and
index finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
5-102
Fuses
Usage
RR Wiper
Rear Window Wiper Switch
SEO ACCY
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
WS WPR
Windshield Wipers
TBC ACCY
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
IGN 3
Ignition, Heated Seats
IGN 0
PCM, TCM
4WD
Four-Wheel Drive System
TBC IGN 0
Truck Body Controller
HTR A/C
Climate Control System
VEH CHMSL
LOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
LT TRLR ST/TRN
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
HVAC 1
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
LT TRN
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
L DOOR
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
VEH STOP
CRUISE
Cruise Control
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
RT TRLR ST/TRN
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
UNLOCK
RT TRN
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
BODY
Harness Connector
DDM
Driver Door Module
AUX PWR 2
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
RR FOG LP
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
BRAKE
Anti-Lock Brake System
DRIVER UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
5-103
Fuses
Usage
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
LOCKS
Power Door Lock System
ECC
Rear Electronic Climate
Control, Liftgate
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
TBC 2C
Truck Body Controller
FLASH
Flasher Module
CB LT DOORS
Left Power Window
Circuit Breaker
TBC 2B
Truck Body Controller
TBC 2A
Truck Body Controller
5-104
Device
Usage
SEO
Special Equipment Option
TRAILER
Trailer Brake Wiring
UPFIT
Upfitter (Not Used)
Device
Usage
SL RIDE
Ride Control Harness
Connection
HDLR 2
Headliner Wiring Connector
BODY
Body Wiring Connector
DEFOG
Rear Defogger Relay
HDLNR 1
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
SPARE RELAY
Not Used
CB SEAT
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
CB RT DOOR
Right Power Window Circuit
Breaker
SPARE
Not Used
INFO
Infotainment Harness
Connection
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-105
5-106
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*5 — PCM Ignition
Fuses
Usage
GLOW PLUG
Not Used
CUST FEED
Accessory Power
STUD #1
Auxiliary Power
MBEC
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
BLOWER
Front Climate Control Fan
LBEC
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules,
Door Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
STUD 2
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Fuses
Usage
ABS
Anti-Lock Brakes
VSES/ECAS
Vehicle Stability
IGN A
Ignition Power
IGN B
Ignition Power
LBEC 1
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
TRL PARK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
RR PARK
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
LR PARK
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
PARK LP
Parking Lamps Relay
STARTER
Starter Relay
INTPARK
Interior Lamps
STOP LP
Stoplamps
TBC BATT
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
5-107
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
SUNROOF
Sunroof
F/PMP
Fuel Pump (Relay)
SEO B2
Off-Road Lamps
B/U LP
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger
4WS
Vent Solenoid
Canister/Quadrasteer Module
Power
RR HVAC
Rear Climate Control
HDLP-HI
Headlamp High Beam Relay
AUX PWR
Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Console
PRIME
Not Used
IGN 1
Ignition Relay
SIR
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
PCM 1
Powertrain Control Module
FRT PARK
ETC/ECM
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
(Relay)
SEO IGN
Rear Defog Relay
TBC IGN1
Truck Body Controller Ignition
IGN E
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Air Conditioning Relay,
Turn Signal/Hazard Switch,
Starter Relay
RTD
Ride Control
HI HDLP-LT
High Beam Headlamp-Left
TRL B/U
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
LH HID
Left Hand High Intensity
Discharge Lamps
PCM B
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
5-108
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
LO HDLP-RT
Headlamp Low Beam-Right
IPC/DIC
FOG LP
Fog Lamp Relay
HVAC/ECAS
Climate Control Controller
FOG LP
Fog Lamps
CIG LTR
Cigarette Lighter
HORN
Horn Relay
HI HDLP-RT
High Beam Headlamp-Right
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
HDLP-LOW
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
W/S WASH
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relay
INFO
OnStar/Rear Seat
Entertainment
RR WPR
Rear Wiper/Washer
RADIO AMP
Radio Amplifier
RADIO
Audio System
RH HID
SEO B1
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
HomeLink, Rear Heated
Seats
Right Hand High Intensity
Discharge Lamp
HORN
Horn Fuse
EAP
Electric Adjustable Pedals
LO HDLP-LT
Headlamp Low Beam-Left
TREC
All-Wheel Drive Module
BTSI
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
SBA
Supplemental Brake Assist
CRANK
Starting System
5-109
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17. All capacities are approximate.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 6000 H.O. V8
N
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See Cooling System on page 5-30.
Cooling System
17.0 quarts
16.0 L
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
31.0 gallons
117.0 L
1.6 lbs.
0.7 kg
Wheels and Tires
Application
Description
Torque
Wheel Nuts
6 bolts (14 mm)
140 lb ft (190 Y)
Tire Pressure
5-110
See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it
was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual.
Part
Oil Filter
Number
PF44*
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
A1518C*
PCV Valve
CV2001-C*
Spark Plugs
41-974* / PZTR5A15†
Fuel Filter
Wiper Blades (Front)
Wiper Blade Length (Front)
GF626*
15153642**
22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
®
*ACDelco Part No.
**GM Part No.
†NGK part number
5-111
✍ NOTES
5-112
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-11
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-11
At Least Once a Month .................................6-11
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-12
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-12
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-15
Steering and Suspension Inspection ................6-15
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-15
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-16
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-16
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ........................6-16
Brake System Inspection ................................6-16
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-17
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-19
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication
scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life
system and how it indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with
each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance
services which are to be performed at the mileage
intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-48.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads on page 4-18.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-15.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle ’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-16.
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
GM Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
6-5
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-14 for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil
and filter change.
Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking brake
cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated unless
their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.
See the mileage intervals following for additional
services that may be performed with an engine oil
change and chassis lubrication. After the services are
performed, record the date, odometer reading and
who performed the service on the maintenance record
pages in Part E of this schedule.
6-6
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel
and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing and condition. Check that the purge valve
works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-8
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.(See footnote +.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter change indicator.
If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter change
indicator at every engine oil change. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See Footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-9
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
6-10
❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
❑ Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for further
details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-66 for further
details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-66 for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24 for further details.
6-11
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-17.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system
and repair if needed.
Wiper Blade Check
At Least Once a Year
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-96.
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the
correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the spare
tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or
turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel wrench/ratchet to
tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
6-12
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, outer tailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt,
fuel door hinge and folding seat hardware. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-35
if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-35 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-13
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-14
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-10.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-39.
6-15
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
6-16
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months, or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil
on page 5-14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24.
Hydraulic
Brake System
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052884,
System
in Canada 993294, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242, or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) or equivalent
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent or
Washer Solvent equivalent.
6-17
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Hood Hinges
6-18
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 10953014, or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437, or equivalent).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Service ...........................................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ...............................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-10
7-1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre
in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
7-4
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside
Service is available only in the United States and
Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period – 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
7-6
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing Service
Battery Jump Starting
Lock Out Assistance
Fuel Delivery
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
Trip Interruption – If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac
dealership.
Reaching Roadside Service
Courtesy Transportation
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. An experienced Roadside Service
Advisor will assist you and request the following
information:
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired.
Cadillac has installed special telecommunication devices
called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service
Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 – daily, 24 hours.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $37.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-10
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner’s Manual
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Or you can write to:
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-11
✍ NOTES
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-22
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-38
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-101
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-50
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-30
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) .............. 3-71
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-32
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-50
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-65
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-57
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-60
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-64
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-57
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-58
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-55
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-53
Air Bag ......................................................... 3-35
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-35
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-34
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-28
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-35
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-50
AM ............................................................... 3-99
Analog Clock .................................................. 3-23
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-101
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-101
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-39
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-93
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-98
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-93
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-96
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-98
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-98
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-99
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-23
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-23
Audio Output .................................................. 3-90
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-66
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-98
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-99
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-101
Care of Your CD Changer ........................... 3-101
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-101
CD Changer ............................................... 3-95
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-101
Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-93
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-67
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-93
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-66
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-98
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-99
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-101
Automatic Climate Control System ..................... 3-24
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-51
Automatic Transmission Check .......................... 6-12
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check ............................................. 6-13
Automatic Transmission ................................... 5-21
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-32
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-58
BATTERY NOT CHARGING ............................. 3-60
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-19
Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-39
2
Before You Drive ............................................ 3-82
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-18
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-12
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-42
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-30
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-42
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-41
Brake ............................................................ 2-35
Parking ...................................................... 2-35
System Inspection ....................................... 6-16
System Warning Light .................................. 3-38
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-28
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-57
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-63
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-62
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-57
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-53
Headlamps ................................................. 5-58
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-57
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-64
Taillamps .................................................... 5-63
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-70
C
Cadillac Owner Privileges™ ............................... 7-6
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-110
Carbon Monoxide ........... 4-42, 4-52, 2-12, 2-22, 2-39
Care of ......................................................... 5-95
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-95
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-99
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-101
Your CD Changer ...................................... 3-101
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-101
Cargo Area, All-Weather .................................. 2-65
Cargo Area Floor Drains .................................. 2-70
Cargo Cover Panels ........................................ 2-55
Cargo Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Cargo Panel Storage System ............................ 2-57
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-65
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-78
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-11
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-78
CD Changer ................................................... 3-95
CD Functions ................................................. 3-97
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-53
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-63
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................ 5-104
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-74
CHANGE ENGINE OIL .................................... 3-59
Charging System Light .................................... 3-36
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-42
CHECK OIL LEVEL ......................................... 3-59
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE ............................... 3-65
CHECK WASHER FLUID ................................. 3-61
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-40
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-26
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-14
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-65
Check ........................................................... 3-42
Engine Light ............................................... 3-42
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-98
Child Restraints .............................................. 1-35
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-35
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-31
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-28
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 1-44
3
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-41
Top Strap ................................................... 1-40
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-23
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-97
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-96
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-93
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-95
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-94
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-94
Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 2-43
Cleaning the Speaker Covers ........................... 5-95
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-94
Cleaning the Windshield and
Wiper Blades .............................................. 5-97
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-98
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-94
Cleaning Wood Panels .................................... 5-95
Cleaning ........................................................ 5-93
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-93
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-98
Video Screen ............................................ 3-101
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
4
Climate Control System ................................... 3-24
Automatic ................................................... 3-24
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-30
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30
Clock ............................................................ 3-23
Compact Disc Changer Errors .......................... 3-97
Compact Disc Messages .................................. 3-81
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-43
Compass Variance .......................................... 2-42
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-26
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant ......................................................... 3-40
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-31
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-45
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-52
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-11
Customer Assistance Information ........................ 7-7
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government .......................... 7-9
Roadside Service .......................................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-29
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18
Door ............................................................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
DRIVER DOOR AJAR ..................................... 3-62
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-47
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-47
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Driver ............................................................ 1-14
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-28
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-26
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-30
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-31
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-59
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-22
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-42
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-36
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-36
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-24
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-57
Driving .......................................................... 4-32
At Night ..................................................... 4-32
City ........................................................... 4-37
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-38
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-40
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-34
Winter ........................................................ 4-42
DVD Player .................................................... 3-82
DVD ............................................................ 3-101
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-101
Distortion .................................................... 3-99
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-82
5
E
Easy Exit Seat ............................................... 2-73
Electrical System ........................................... 5-101
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-101
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-101
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-101
Electrochromic Mirror Operation ........................ 2-42
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs ................................. 3-44
ENGINE COOLANT HOT ................................. 3-59
Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-11
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-17
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication Scheduled
Maintenance ................................................. 6-5
Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-11
ENGINE OVERHEATED .................................. 3-60
Engine .......................................................... 5-19
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-19
Battery ....................................................... 5-43
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-42
Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-31
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-40
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-16
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-39
6
Engine (cont.)
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Starting ...................................................... 2-29
Entertainment System .................................... 3-101
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-101
DVD Distortion ............................................ 3-99
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-20
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-51
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-27
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
F
Filter ............................................................. 5-19
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19
Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™) ............. 3-71
Finding a Station ............................................ 3-69
Finish Care .................................................... 5-96
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-98
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-101
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Fluid ............................................................. 5-21
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-37
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-99
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Following Distance .......................................... 4-58
Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-52
Fuel Information Button .................................... 3-50
FUEL LEVEL LOW ......................................... 3-61
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-46
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-46
System Inspection ....................................... 6-16
Fuses .......................................................... 5-101
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-101
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-101
G
Gage ............................................................ 3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40
Fuel .......................................................... 3-46
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-44
Speedometer .............................................. 3-33
Tachometer ................................................. 3-33
Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-40
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-37
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-48
Gasoline ......................................................... 5-4
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-51
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-20
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-52
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8
7
Headlamp ...................................................... 5-53
Aiming ....................................................... 5-53
Horizontal Aiming ......................................... 5-54
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 5-55
Headlamps .................................................... 5-58
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-57
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-62
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-57
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-57
Headphones ................................................... 3-88
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heating ......................................................... 3-28
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-40
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-40
Hitches .......................................................... 4-57
HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-49
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-48
Hood ............................................................ 5-10
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-7
How the System Works ................................... 3-21
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-32
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-23
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-51
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-37
How to Check ........................................ 5-21, 5-67
8
How to Inspect ............................................... 5-19
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-36
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
Ignition Positions .............................................
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ......................
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors .........................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation — Tire Pressure .................................
Inspection ......................................................
Brake System .............................................
Engine Cooling System ................................
Exhaust System ..........................................
Fuel System ...............................................
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
Steering and Suspension ..............................
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) ......................................
5-29
5-28
3-43
3-43
4-46
4-53
4-44
2-28
6-14
2-25
1-31
5-67
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-15
6-16
6-15
6-15
6-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-18
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................... 5-102
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-32
Cluster ....................................................... 3-32
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-18
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-12
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW ............................. 3-63
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
Lamps ...........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-14,
3-16
3-14
3-14
3-18
1-23
LATCH System ............................................... 1-42
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-44
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ...... 2-37
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR ................................ 3-63
Light ............................................................. 3-34
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-34
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-39
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-38
Charging System ......................................... 3-36
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-45
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-46
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-42
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................ 3-35
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-33
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-45
Traction Off ................................................ 3-39
Listening to a DVD ......................................... 3-81
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-19
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-48
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks ............................................................. 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
9
Locks (cont.)
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-17
LOW COOLANT LEVEL .................................. 3-59
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-46
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-53
Lumbar ........................................................... 1-3
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance and Cleaning ............................... 2-66
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-111
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-11
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-11
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-11
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-12
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-12
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-16
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-16
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-15
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-16
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
10
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-11
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-15
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-17
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-19
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5
Steering and Suspension Inspection ............... 6-15
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ....................... 6-16
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-60
Making Turns ................................................. 4-58
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-72
Message ....................................................... 3-58
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Midgate Drain Grate Removal and Cleaning ....... 2-69
Midgate Operation ........................................... 2-13
Midgate ......................................................... 2-12
Mirrors .......................................................... 2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-41
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist ...................................... 2-45
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-44
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-45
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-44
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-93
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-28
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-111
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-33
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-15
OIL LIFE RESET ............................................ 3-59
OIL PRESSURE LOW ..................................... 3-59
Oil ................................................................ 5-14
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-44
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-47
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-46
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-47
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-46
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-47
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-18
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30
Outside ......................................................... 2-45
Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist ...................................... 2-45
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-44
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-45
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-44
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-27
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-11
P
Park Aid ........................................................
Park (P) ........................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
Park (P) Mechanism Check ...........................
Parking on Hills ..............................................
3-20
2-38
2-38
6-14
4-59
11
Parking ......................................................... 3-20
Assist ........................................................ 3-20
Brake ........................................................ 2-35
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-39
Park(P) ......................................................... 2-36
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-36
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-11
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-15
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .................................................. 6-17
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-19
Passenger Air Bag Indicator ............................. 2-43
Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator ................... 3-35
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-63
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-60
Passing ................................................. 4-15, 4-58
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-27 .
ii
Personalization Button ..................................... 3-51
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-30
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-76
Playing a Compact Disc ................................... 3-79
Playing the Radio ........................................... 3-68
Power Steering ............................................... 4-13
12
Power ........................................................... 3-22
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-22
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-101
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-37
Windows .................................................... 2-25
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-49
Puddle Lamps ................................................ 3-16
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-12
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ............................... 3-67
Radio Messages ............................................. 3-73
Radios .......................................................... 3-66
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-99
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-101
Care of Your CD Changer ........................... 3-101
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-101
CD Changer ............................................... 3-95
Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-93
Radios (cont.)
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-67
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-93
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-66
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-98
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-99
RDS Messages .............................................. 3-72
Reaching Roadside Service ............................... 7-7
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-19
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-25
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-54
Rear Seat Audio Controls ................................. 3-94
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-93
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-82
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-6
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-22
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-29
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-41
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-48
REDUCED ENGINE POWER ........................... 3-60
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels .................. 2-61
Remote Control .............................................. 3-86
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-77
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-64
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-42
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-66
Reporting Safety Defects ................................. 7-10
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-10
United States Government .............................. 7-9
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-52
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-52
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-12
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-65
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-66
Restraint Systems ........................................... 1-65
Checking .................................................... 1-65
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-66
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-29
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ......... 1-22
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-63
Road Sensing Suspension ................................. 4-9
Roadside Service Availability .............................. 7-6
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired ........................................... 7-7
13
Roadside ......................................................... 7-6
Service ........................................................ 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-46
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-40
S
Safety Belt ..................................................... 3-33
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-33
Safety Belts ................................................... 5-95
Care of ...................................................... 5-95
Driver Position ............................................ 1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........ 1-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-22
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-57
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-21
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5
Seat ............................................................... 1-5
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
14
Seats .............................................................. 1-3
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-72
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-6
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-89
Securing a Child Restraint ................................ 1-44
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-44
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-44
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-46
Select Button ................................................. 3-58
SERVICE 4WD ............................................... 3-60
SERVICE AIR BAG ......................................... 3-60
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM ............................. 3-60
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-10
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL .............................. 3-61
SERVICE STABILITY ...................................... 3-64
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR ............................... 3-65
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-42
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ....................... 3-72
Setting Preset Stations .................................... 3-69
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-66
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......................... 3-70
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-98
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-36
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-38
Side Rail Channels ......................................... 2-68
Skidding ........................................................ 4-17
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-36
Spare Tire Check ............................................ 6-12
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-92
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-110
Speedometer .................................................. 3-33
Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-10
STABILITY SYS ACTIVE .................................. 3-64
STABILITY SYS DISABLED .............................. 3-64
STABILITY SYS LIMITED ................................. 3-64
STABILITY SYS READY .................................. 3-64
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-29
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-13
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-29
Steering and Suspension Inspection .................. 6-15
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-14
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-13
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-98
Steering ........................................................ 4-13
Stereo RCA Jacks .......................................... 3-89
Storage Areas ................................................
All-Weather Cargo Area ................................
Center Console Storage Area ........................
Cupholder(s) ...............................................
Glove Box ..................................................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................
Top-Box Storage ..........................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire,
Jack and Tools ............................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-65
2-65
2-53
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-70
5-86
4-46
2-25
2-71
T
Tachometer ....................................................
Tailgate Removal ............................................
Tailgate .........................................................
Taillamps .......................................................
Temperature and Compass Display ....................
Testing the Alarm ............................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................
Passlock® ...................................................
Throttle, Adjustable ..........................................
3-33
2-23
2-22
5-63
2-41
2-27
3-98
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-30
15
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP ...................................... 3-61
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-11
Tires ............................................................. 5-66
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-70
Chains ....................................................... 5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Inflation — Tire Pressure .............................. 5-67
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-68
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-92
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-72
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-73
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-69
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-31
Top Drain Grates – Removal and Cleaning ......... 2-67
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-41
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-40
Top-Box Storage ............................................. 2-70
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-38
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-56
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-45
Tow/Haul Mode Selector Button ........................ 2-34
Towing .......................................................... 4-48
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-48
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-52
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-48
16
Towing (cont.)
Traction Control Operation ................................ 4-11
TRACTION SYS LIMITED ................................ 3-63
Traction ......................................................... 3-39
Off Light ..................................................... 3-39
Road Sensing Suspension .............................. 4-9
Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-10
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-57
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-61
Trailer ........................................................... 4-51
Recommendations ....................................... 4-51
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE ............................. 3-62
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-50
TRANSMISSION HOT ..................................... 3-62
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-32
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-10
Transmission .................................................. 5-21
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-40
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-20
Trip Information Button .................................... 3-48
Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 4-51
Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-8
TURN SIGNAL ON ......................................... 3-61
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-58
U
W
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-20
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-14
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-105
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-99
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-71
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-51
Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-47
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31
Warnings ....................................................... 3-58
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-96
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-12
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-56
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-54
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-16
What to Add .................................................. 5-40
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
What to Use .......................... 5-25, 5-37, 5-38, 5-51
Wheels .......................................................... 5-72
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-72
Replacement ............................................... 5-73
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-15
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-17
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-21
When to Check Lubricant ................................. 5-51
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-37
When to Check .............................................. 5-67
When to Inspect ............................................. 5-19
V
Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5-100
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-100
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-100
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-72
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-72
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-43
Vehicle ............................................................ 4-6
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-48
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Video Screen ................................................. 3-85
Visors ........................................................... 2-25
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-37
17
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill ..................................................... 4-60
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-9
Windows ....................................................... 2-24
Power ........................................................ 2-25
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-11
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-38
Windshield Wiper ............................................ 5-65
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-65
Fuses ...................................................... 5-101
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-42
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-12
18
X
XM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only) ............. 3-67
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-101
XM™ Satellite Radio Service (USA Only) ............. 3-99
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement